JP6534504B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine provided with a display device, a so-called pachinko machine, a lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit is made based on the game ball winning in the starting opening, and a symbol is variably displayed on the display device. The symbol is stopped and displayed in a corresponding manner. Also, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit symbol is displayed on the display device in a stopped state to generate a big hit gaming state. In this type of gaming machine, a large number of proposals have been proposed to execute an advance notice effect that suggests that the symbol stopped and displayed on the display device will be the big hit symbol (for example, see Patent Document 1) .

JP, 2013-248305, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, although a plurality of types of advance notice effects are executed according to the possibility of becoming a big hit, while the high probability of becoming a big hit is rarely performed because the low probability of becoming a big hit is low. As a result of frequent execution of preview effects that are unlikely to be a big hit, there is a risk that the player may get bored with the preview effects and, on the contrary, may decrease the interest in playing the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game interest with respect to a preview effect.

(Solution 1)
A determination unit that determines whether it is a hit based on the establishment of the start condition;
Specific gaming state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state useful to the player when it is determined by the determination means that the game is a hit;
Providing an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a predetermined advance effect is performed .
The predetermined effect display area of the effect display means has a plurality of erosion areas, and the preliminary announcement effect image is made to appear in the form of eroding a part of the plurality of erosion areas ,
When all of the plurality of erosion areas of the predetermined effect display area are eroded, an erosion effect for recognizing that the whole is eroded is displayed across the plurality of erosion areas, and the erosion effect is displayed. After the symbol is stopped after stopping the symbol, the special effect state transition effect is displayed, which recognizes that the special effect state is to be shifted before the start of the fluctuation of the next symbol, and the predetermined In the case where all of the plurality of erosion areas in the effect display area are eroded, it is expected that the specific gaming state is controlled as compared to the case where all of the plurality of erosion areas in the predetermined effect display area is not eroded It is believed that the degree is high,
When making the effect image appear in the form of eroding a part of the plurality of erosion areas of the predetermined effect display area, a new effect different from the effect image made to appear to the already eroded erosion area Make it possible to appear as an image,
A game machine characterized in that the erosion degree of the predetermined effect display area is recognizable.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment with respect to the notice effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted the left frame member and looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from lower side, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, (b) is from behind with the upper countersink retractor mounted on the countersink unit base It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit of a disc unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a payout device, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line E-E in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front component and front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit bottom in the front unit and the upper part from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit lower and the side unit top from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of a front unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path on the right side in center goods in a cross section. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attachment unit vicinity in a center thing, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back movable back production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable movable production unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back and back movable presentation unit into every main composition, and was seen from the front, (b) disassembles the back and back back movable presentation unit into each main composition, and is after It is the disassembled perspective view seen. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit of the back bottom back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front with a back bottom back 1st decoration body and a back bottom back 2nd decoration body. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the back with a 1st back decoration and a back 2nd decoration with a back decoration. It is an explanatory view showing the drive system of a back down and back movable presentation unit from the front. (A) is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the normal state, and (b) is a back-to-back rotation of the first decorative body and the back-to-back second decorative body from the normal state. It is a front view in the state which turned the 2nd decoration side of the lower back 2nd decoration to the front, and (c) is the back side in front of the 1st decoration and the back 2nd decoration in the state of (b) It is a front view in a state of being moved to the left moving end. In the state of FIG. 104 (c), the first back of the first decorative body and the second back of the second back are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first back of the first back is turned to the front. (E) is a front view of the state, (e) is the back of the back of the state of (d), the first decoration is rotated to open the first decoration and the back of the second decoration, and the back is back It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration side of the 1st decoration and the 2nd decoration side of the back decoration and the 2nd decoration turned to the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up left movable presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up left movable presentation unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit It is a front view shown in the state moved to the position of the right end, and (c) is a front view showing the back top left first decoration and the back top left second decoration from the state of (b) It is. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit from the back. (A) is a front view which shows a back left movable presentation unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view shown in the state which made the back left movable decoration body in a back left movable presentation unit project. (A) is the perspective view which looked at a back production inside of a back unit inside from a front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at a back up inside movable presentation unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up inside movable motive production unit into every main composition, and was seen from the front, (b) disassembles the back up middle back movable presentation unit into every main composition, it is from the back It is the disassembled perspective view seen. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top inside decoration unit of the back up inside movable movable effect unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top inside decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration unit inside back, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration unit inside back, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of a back top inside decoration unit from a front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in (a). (A) is a front view of the back top inside decoration unit in a normal state, and (b) shows a pair of back top inside first decoration of the back top inside decoration unit in a half-opened state It is a front view, and (c) is a front view showing a pair of back top and center first decoration bodies of the back top and center decoration body unit in a state in which it is completely opened outward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper inside drive unit of the back up inside movable movable effect unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper inside drive unit of the back upward moving movable effect unit from the back is there. (A) is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the back and top drive unit in each main configuration, and (b) is a back view of the back and top drive unit disassembled in each main configuration It is a disassembled perspective view. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up inside rotation unit of the back up inside drive unit, and was seen from the front, (b) disassembles the back up inside rotation unit of the back up inside drive unit, and it is from the back It is the disassembled perspective view seen. It is an explanatory view showing the drive system of a movable effect unit of a back up middle during a front roughly. (A) is a front view of a back up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back up middle decoration unit lowered in the back up middle movable effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled except back-bottom front decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled except back-bottom front decoration unit, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back bottom front decoration unit of a back bottom front movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back bottom front decoration unit of a back bottom front movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in a back down front movable presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of a decoration unit raising / lowering mechanism when raising a back bottom front decoration unit, and (b) expands and shows the part of a unit raising / lowering pin in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is expansion of (b) further, and is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a unit raising / lowering pin and the slit for raising / lowering. (A) It is a front view which shows a back lower front movable effect unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decoration unit from the state of (a) (c 2.) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back 1st front decoration of the back 2 front decoration unit from the state of (b). The back of the back unit In the movable effect unit, the back decoration first decoration and the back decoration second decoration are rotated together in the normal position, and the second decoration surface is shown facing front It is a front view. The back of the back unit The back of the movable effect unit The first decoration of the back decoration and the back of the second decoration are closed and the back of the first decoration of the first decoration is turned to the front with the back of the first decoration. A state in which the slide top is moved to the approximate center in the left and right direction, and the back top left first decoration and the back top left second decoration on the back move left movable effect unit are slide to the approximate center in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit, and the second decoration surface of each of the first decoration and the second back is reversely displayed. And turn the back top left second decoration of the back top left movable effect unit by hinge to open the fixed top decoration of the top back left first decoration and the second top decoration of the back top left second decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state directed to the front. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit, and the second decoration surface of each of the first decoration and the second back is reversely displayed. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being directed to. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position of the front end right end. Move the decoration unit on the back of the movable unit in the back unit to the lower end position and move the decoration unit on the back to diagonally down in the front view in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is a front view of the game board shown in the rotated state. FIG. 138 A front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slide-moved to the half open half open position. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to the fully open position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back first front decoration is hingedly rotated from the state of FIG. 140 to be raised above the second back front decoration. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a prior determination table used for the effect prior determination process, and (B) is a table about the type details of the prior determination information determined by the prior determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of big hit Symbol determination table used for It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the monochrome advance notice execution processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is an area | region occupation pattern determination table used in order to determine the area | region occupation pattern in execution of a monochrome advance production. It is an example which shows the field which makes advance notice production appear among the display fields of the main liquid crystal display in execution of monochrome notice production. It is an example of presentation when monochrome advance announcement production is performed. It is an example of presentation when monochrome advance announcement production is performed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, etc., an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-like door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which has a square outer shape in a front view and which penetrates back and forth, and a front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100 A bowl unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100 The game ball stored through the unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit 200 through the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 and stored in the upper plate 201 Handle unit 500 which can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear face of the door frame base unit 100. And the game cover of the upper tray 201 attached to the lower portion of the rear face of the door frame base unit 100, which receives the game ball which is accidentally dropped into the game area and discharged to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200. A ball feed unit 540 for feeding to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through hole 111, and a crime prevention cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base in a front view. , And the door Locking unit 700 for locking between 3 and main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side A unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 openably and closably attached to the main frame base 600 And a back cover 980.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The dispensing device 830 which dispenses one by one based on an instruction from the dispensing control substrate 951 (see FIG. 142) accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950, and is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 and dispensed by the dispensing device 830 An upper full-ball path unit 850 which guides the game ball downward and releases the game ball from either the normal release port or the full release port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guiding path which is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And there is a full tank induction route which guides gaming balls discharged from the full tank outlet forwardly to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full sphere path unit 860, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a where the game ball is struck as shown in FIGS. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 There is a box-like substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side of the rear and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 The main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings that can be installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and receive the game balls hit into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper substrate box 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing an exploded view of (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left side edge part. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A and a rear lower lower fixing portion 88 of the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 15 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a whose right and left extend with a predetermined width and an operation part projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A large plate 72 rising up, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 vertically penetrated so that only one game ball can pass And the discharge hole 74 of the The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws inserted from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. .

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bending bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the locking member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  The front end portion of the lock main body 66a faces the front protrusion 62 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 even if the shape of the front end face is not an arc. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even when the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.18 (a) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a).

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the gaming ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state where it is, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 by the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 because it is not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc. Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a door frame base unit 100 having a frame-like outer shape in a front view, a plate unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, and the front lower right of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 mounted through the pan unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the rear cover lower surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. And a crime prevention cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back direction; A tubular handle attachment member 120 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and for attaching the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side attached to upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left side in the front view and projecting forward and rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Although the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is vertically arranged in a row and bulges forward, and can store the game balls; an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202; A plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image; On the right side of the top plate 201 in a front view, the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the top plate effect button 257 operable by the player, the plate unit cover 260 covering the top plate 201 and the bottom plate 202 from the front side A door lower right rendering unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotating according to the gaming state is covered from the front side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 into the lower plate 202, and a device for removing gaming balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball draining unit 320, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, A top plate top decoration member 340 attached to the top of the tray unit base 210 and capable of emitting light is mainly provided.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 etc., a unit base 360 having a part of which is translucent attached to the front side of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side; A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the center of the right and left at the front of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker mounted in the top decoration member 370 and outputting high-pitched sound ( A door frame upper decorative substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front of the base 410 and having its upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 A left speaker unit 430 attached at a position to be the upper left corner of 3 and having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front of the base 460 and having its upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame at the front of the right side decorative member 470 A right speaker unit 480 mounted at a position to be the upper right corner of 3 and having a right speaker (not shown), and mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front And a door frame right decoration substrate (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle main body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502, as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 506 that can be pivoted by the player, and a handle cover 506 attached to the handle main body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supporting the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle main body 502 And have. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) mounted in the handle main body 502 and detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and It includes a stop button which can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) attached to the inside of the handle main body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

  As shown in FIG. 24, FIG. 25 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56 etc., the fal cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-like unit main body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side. Main components 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front of the unit body 522 are provided. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and connects the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 to the upper countersink supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. And 526, a full tank receiving hole 528 that opens rearward at the right side in a front view of the through ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A ball that opens upward at the right side of the ball socket 528 in a front view and receives a game ball (far ball) that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball receptacle 530 and the bowl unit 200 which is opened forward in the lower right corner in a front view and releases gaming balls received in the full ball receptacle 528 and the far ball receptacle 530. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and a box-like unit main body 542 which extends left and right and whose rear side is opened as shown in FIGS. The unit cover 544 removably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 in a box shape with the front side opened and in a front view right side of the fal cover unit 520, A ball entry port 546 to which gaming balls stored in 201 enter, a ball exit port 548 which can release game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and is opened toward the rear, a ball entrance The game ball which has entered into 546 can be discharged, and there is provided a ball discharge port 550 which is open toward the front below the ball entry port 546. Also, although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 is a ball feeding solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball outlet 548, and the ball entering And a switching mechanism for switching the game ball entering from the port 546 to either the ball outlet 548 side or the ball outlet 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the frame of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. Fig.30 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a dish unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from the bottom. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from the bottom. 39 is a plan view of the pan unit, FIG. 40 is an enlarged sectional view of a part of the rendering operation unit in the B-B cross section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is a rendering operation in the C-C cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Furthermore, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the pan unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit, and FIG. 43 (a) is the door lower right rendering unit It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 44 is a D-D cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of a rotating member internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating member internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 49 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and FIG. 49 (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the front with the upper countersinking unit attached to the dish unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is attached the upper countersinking unit to the dish unit base It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken out from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower countersinking unit of the tray unit, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower countersink unit taken apart and viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 is disposed from the upper plate 201 below the upper plate 201 and stores the game balls which are paid out from the payout device 830 and which hold gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing a ball. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 210, and the left side is greatly expanded forward from the left and right center. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the left and right center at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and bulging forward largely to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the pan unit 200 covers the front and bottom sides of the rendering operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper pan body 212 and the front surface of the pan unit base 210, the upper pan body 212, the lower pan body 214, and the rendering operation unit. A tray unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit 270 disposed on the right side of the rendering operation unit 220 and mounted to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit A game unit cover 300 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 covering the front side of the 270 and the gaming ball attached so as to sandwich the tray unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper tray 201 of the upper tray main body 212 And the lower tray body 214 below the lower tray body 214. Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the bowl unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220, and a bowl rental operation unit 330 for operating a bowl rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the gaming hall, It is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210, and it is attached to the light-decorable top tray top decoration member 340 and the front left side of the tray unit base 210 behind the tray unit cover 260 and can emit light forward. The unit is attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 behind the dish unit left decoration substrate 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, behind the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270, and facing forward Dish unit right decoration board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, and mounted on the back side of the dish unit base 210 An upper dish front decoration board 233, an upper dish back decoration board 235, an upper dish liquid crystal board 241, an excitation device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decoration board 251, an effect button press sensor 258, a door lower right relay board 281, A dish unit left decorative board 345, and a dish unit relay board 347 relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

3-1a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally to the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The pan unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 210a and extends in a cylindrical shape extending backward. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower circular sphere feed port 210c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part in the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward, The ball feeding port 210c is provided with an upper flat ball feed port 210d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically and whose upper portion is positioned at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 210 is a through hole 210e having a square inner periphery penetrating in the front and rear direction on the left side in a front view of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. Piece 210f, relief hole 210g penetrating back and forth in front right upper side of upper flat ball feed port 210d, and front and back in front right lower corner of front view and handle attachment member 120 of door frame base unit 100 is inserted Handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i which is penetrated back and forth near the front right corner and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right side front view of a cylindrical lower circular sphere supply port 210c And a notch 210j which is cut away from the rear end to the front in the side surface of the frame.

[3-1 b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, is formed in the shape of a container which is greatly expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. ing. The upper tray main body 212 is opened only to the left and the rear on the right end side in a front view, and includes a guiding passage portion 212a through which the game ball can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper tray body 212 attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is from the lower position of the upper bowl ball supply port 210a to the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls are received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 is provided with a metal ground fitting 212b which extends from the center on the left and right to the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the gaming balls are in contact, static electricity charged on the gaming balls can be removed.

[3-1 c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower tray body 214 of the tray unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in a plan view with a rear end side longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and rearward. The lower bowl body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a which penetrates up and down at the bottom and can be closed by the lower bowl ball removal unit 320, and the bottom is inclined to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. doing. The lower dish main body 214 can receive and store gaming balls discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and makes the gaming balls downward of the dish unit 200 from the ball extraction holes 214a. It can be discharged.

[3-1 d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the left and right front view, and the attachment base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A The unit cover 224 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and the decoration member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire periphery at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is formed of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by alleviating the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It can reduce that the vibration by the vibration excitation apparatus 242 is transmitted to the attachment base unit 220A or the plate unit base 210 side.

[3-1 d-1. Mounting base unit]
The mounting base unit 220A of the rendering operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 attached at the front end of the upper tray main body 212 and being open at the upper end capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from the upper side and a horizontally long upper tray attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover which covers the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232 and the upper plate front decoration substrate 233 disposed between the front lens member 232, the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs at the front surface And 240. A translucent upper-dish front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs for emitting light upward, and a decoration substrate 235 for upper dish and an upper side of the decoration board 235 for upper dish. Between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property disposed on the unit cover 224 and the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 And a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side in a front view of the upper back decoration member 236, and a button attachment member. And an upper disc ball release button 239 slidably mounted up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 is a flat-plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined downward from the approximate center of the front to the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a. And a cylindrical cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through hole 230b. The through hole 230 b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed as it goes downward (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner circumferential wall extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner circumferential wall is below the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It inclines and extends forward as it goes to the other side. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes forward and backward from the accommodation recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view from the front to the left and the other in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pin 231b, and a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a at right and left, and from the left and right center of the bottom of the housing recess 231a It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and separated to the left and right. .

  The unit case 231 is vertically and circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit attachment portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C, a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending downward from the upper end and extending laterally from the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodation recess 231a And a notch portion 231h.

  The housing concave portion 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a shape in plan view is a combination of a square extending in the left and right direction and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the square. Further, the bottom of the square portion of the housing recess 231a is formed lower than the bottom of the trapezoidal portion of the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a is formed slightly lower than the height (the length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four horizontal support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. In addition, the horizontal support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i at the upper end side, the diameter of which decreases toward the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The distance between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a and the middle of the tapered portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length of the horizontal support pin 231 b is longer than that of the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c is insertable into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than a half length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving protrusion 231 e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving protrusion 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward toward the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. It extends. Further, the receiving projection 231e is extended so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 230 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The upper front decoration member 234 exposes the front to the outside when the lower unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish and rear decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for emitting and decorating the upper dish and rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the light receiving section 237a disposed on the upper side of the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235; And a flat linear light emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 in a continuous manner. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a by fitting the linear light emitting portion 237b into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to make the linear light emitting unit 237b The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper disc ball release button 239 is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a which extends downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 respectively inserted into the four horizontal support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220 B side acts, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent and transmitted to the mounting base 230 by the bending.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface inclined with respect to the surface (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B) on which they are formed. Because the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. Do. As a result, the force from the side of the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-like lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, and an upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 attached from the upper side in the lower case 240. The upper case is attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper sides of a pair of vibration devices 242, the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 disposed in the lower case 240 outside the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 A shallow box-like base member 243, an upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 inserted from the upper side in the base member 243 and capable of displaying an image under control of the upper-dish liquid crystal substrate 241; A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the top surface of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In the state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at their rear end surfaces. It has a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 which extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 etc. ing.

  The outer case of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213 a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213 a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular substrate attachment portion 240 a extending in the left and right direction, a flat plate-like projection 240 b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the substrate attachment portion 240 a, and the projection 240 b. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and which are partially opened to the outside in the left and right direction and spaced apart back and forth and projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c The vibration device mounting portion 240e is disposed between the flange portion 240d and the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b, and is disposed closer to the substrate mounting portion 240a and to which the vibration generating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C-shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240 d is insertable into the groove 222 a of the damper 222.

  The excitation device 242 includes a small excitation drive motor 242 a and a weight 242 b attached with the center of gravity eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the excitation drive motor 242 a. The vibration generator 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242 b by the vibration drive motor 242 a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a formed in a shallow box shape by inserting the upper-tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side, and extending portions 243 b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a. A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip end of the extending portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side to pass through the tapered portion 231i of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the proximal end (lower side) than the tapered portion 231i It is formed in the size which can not pass.

  The touch panel 246 is provided with a tempered glass which is resistant to breakage due to impact, a capacitive sensor transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover covering the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The damper 222 can be attached to the touch unit 220B by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C character into the damper attachment recess 240c provided on the left and right of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. As a result, axial movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240 c is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Stand out.

  Further, in the touch unit 220 B, the excitation drive motor 242 a of the pair of excitation devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of excitation devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when the liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid may enter the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

3-1d-3. Button unit]
The button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A and the lower portion of the unit body 250. A presentation button decoration substrate 251 disposed on the side and provided with LEDs on the top surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the bottom side of the presentation button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the bottom side of the unit body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, with the button base 253 being inserted between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250. A spring member 254 for urging the light guide member 255, a light guide member 255 which is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255 Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, an upper plate effect button 257 having a light transmitting property that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the top surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 extends outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and has three attachment pieces 250a attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 has a cylindrical lower cylindrical portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical cylindrical upper cylindrical portion 253b whose diameter increases in the upward direction from the upper end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a, and an upper portion A claw which extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end is capable of penetrating the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and which can be projected outward from the lower end and can be engaged (contacted) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250 A pair of engaging claws 253c having a pair of pins and radially outwardly projecting shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253.

  The light guiding member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guiding parts 255b are provided to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire top surface of the main part 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper dish effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they may slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper dish effect button 257 projects upward than the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface 250, the further rise is regulated, and the upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the rising end.

  When the upper dish effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper dish effect button 257 etc. is lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper dish effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 are in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can emit light and decorate the upper dish effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full color LEDs, and the upper dish effect buttons 257 can be lighted and decorated in various colors.

3-1d-4. Characteristics of Production Operation Unit]
In the effect operation unit 220 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B in the assembled state is from the lower surface of the lower case 240 Also, since it protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and the touch unit 220B is moved upward relative to the horizontal support pins 231b. The movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. The tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 tapers downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached from the upper side in the pyramidal cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the whole pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 in a state where the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floats in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 etc., in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). Striped). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting part 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the right side in a front view of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, an upper plate ball withdrawal button 239 is disposed. Furthermore, the button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and enjoyed.

  An image imitating the operation button is displayed as the image displayed on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the detection of the touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted to allow the player to receive the image. The operation button can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the game state. It can be vibrated. In the effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration generator 242 so that the finger of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246 vibrates the touch panel 246. Even if the player operates the image operation button to the player, the player can be surprised as though the user operates the operation button having a substantial effect, and can be surprised by the touch panel 246 and the effect by the vibration. Can be entertained to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, the player is allowed to press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the game state. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation button on the touch panel 246 is a touch only on the touch panel 246, and there is a dislike that it lacks the feeling of operation compared to the actual operation button. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is disposed at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game is performed even during the effect other than using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) is applied from above, the left and right horizontal support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted dampers 222, and the touch unit 220B is lowered while the dampers 222 are lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts on the left and right bottom surfaces of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center thereof moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e which project downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving protrusion 231e is further lowered by an impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B An impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  The outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid which is respectively narrowed downward, so from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side) The load to be transmitted is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, by the number of layers of structures that absorb the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. Thus, the touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the rear peripheral edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper dish rear decorative substrate 235 according to the gaming state The top end of 237 b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration light up decoration member 236 which is arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side than the linear light emitting portion 237b) by the decoration LED 235a of the decoration back light board 235 be able to. By making the upper back decoration member 236 emit light and decoration, as with the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. It is possible to enjoy the effects presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is covered by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows downward (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the upper plate 201. Thus, it is possible to prevent the dew condensation water from intruding into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

[3-1 e. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 and is formed in a shell-like shape with the centers at the left and right bulging forward and being opened rearward. . The pan unit cover 260 opens forward substantially at the center between the left and right, and has a lower pan opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the pan unit base 210 and a top plate side (upper side) in the inner peripheral wall of the lower pan opening 261 And a lower cover portion 262 covering the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220, and a bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 disposed on the left side in front view of the lower plate opening 261 The speaker grill 263 for transmitting the sound from the speakers, the plate unit left decoration member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the plate unit left decoration substrate 345 and disposed on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view And the bottom of the dish unit cover 260 is formed by the handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening portion 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner circumferential wall. The speaker grille 263 and the plate unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal provided with a plurality of holes in a metal plate.

  The surface of the plate unit cover 260 is formed to have a smooth surface on the left side in a front view, while the surface on the right side is formed to have a rough surface. In addition, the right side in the front view has a light transmitting property substantially entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in an assembled state with the plate unit 200 such that an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be held by one hand. Thus, when the player performs touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and touch operation on the touch unit 220B is performed. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the lower pan covering part 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined at about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Thus, the player can grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper tray lower covering portion 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1 f. Door lower right production unit]
The door lower right rendering unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and to the right of the rendering operation unit 200 as shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for emitting light is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the relief opening 210g, and is attached to the unit base 271 rotatably supporting the door lower right rotating body 270A and to the unit base 271 A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotary body 270A, a follower And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  In addition, the door lower right rendering unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A with the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271 and a rotation of the door lower right-handed rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271 Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decoration member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side in a front view of the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a back side of the unit base 271 A door lower right base decoration substrate 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 1510 and later, and.

  The door lower right rotation body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and each is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 in a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, a band decoration 285 b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285 b The heart of the decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286 b having metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285 b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286 b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk shape and is provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 and the center of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 A cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the bottom right side of the door lower right rotation body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 A cylindrical shape which is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277 And a second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay substrate 281 and the door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291 is inserted in the second fixed shaft member 293.

  In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And an annular, axially outwardly opened first reflector 295 mounted on the reflector base 294 and a reflector base 294 mounted inside the annular ring of the first reflector 295 to the center and having a hexagonal shape And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Relatively rotatable, they are separated from each other.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape forward from the front right upper portion with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotation body 270A and the ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b projecting in the second direction, and a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a plate shape forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape toward the rear from the front end.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft passes through. The driven gear 274 is formed larger in diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b which protrudes from the attachment portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271 d of the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271 c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the door lower right rotation body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotation body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 49B) Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. It is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like depending on whether or not the player is entertained and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right rendering unit 270, the door right right while the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates When the lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 (of the LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotary body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotary body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 or the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the light emitting decoration of the door lower right rotating body 270A is lit as if the light is blinking even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 is not blinked The door lower right rotation body 270A can be made to emit light in a rainbow color by being made to emit light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect unit cover 300 of the pan unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotary body cover portion 301 covering the front side of the spherical door lower right rotary body 270A in the door lower right staging unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side in a front view of the plate unit cover 260 and penetrating in the front and rear in the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the form of a container whose back is open as a whole, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decoration substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decoration substrate 346 Embellished by

[3-1 h. Upper bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper bowl / balloon removing unit 310 of the bowl unit 200 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the bowl unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a in the upper part of which the extension piece 239a of the upper countersink ball release button 239 can be inserted at the upper part thereof, and a through hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311 A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left of the front view, a press transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and pivoted by pressing of the upper disc ball release button 239, and a press transmission member And 313 a first spring member 314 which biases the upper disc ball release button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper disc ball removing unit 310 is provided with a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the disc unit base 210 so as to close the upper disc ball feed port 210d of the disc unit base 210 from the rear side; An upper disc ball withdrawal slider 316 disposed between the disc unit base 210 and the disc unit base 210 and mounted so as to be vertically movable by the rear base member 315 and in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the pan unit base 210, and has a flat base 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extended flats extending forward from the left and right sides of the base 312a. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape An upper extension piece 313c which extends in a flat plate shape upward from near the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper disc ball release button 239 And a lower extending piece 313d extending downward in a flat plate shape from the right end in the front view on the lower surface of the rear extending piece 313b, and a downward direction from the lower side near the left end in the front view in the shaft portion 313a And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313 d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper countersink slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends flatly in parallel to the rear surface of the pan unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the pan unit base 210, and is separately provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a The slider support portion 315b slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the front end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It has an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base part 315a and through which gaming balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward and has a lower end curved in the rear direction, and An L-shaped second induction passage 315e which extends downward from the lower side of the first induction passage 315d and extends leftward in a front view and whose left end is opened leftward and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat channel lid 315f closing the rear end side of the left extending portion of the induction path 315e and the L-shaped second induction path 315e. An opening 315g is provided, and a spring locking portion 315h protruding in a boss shape forward from the front surface of the base 315a and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the left-side extending portion becomes lower toward the left. The left end of the second induction passage 315e is, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower bowl ball supply port 210c in the plate unit base 210, and the second induction passage 315e and The lower flat ball supply port 210c is in communication with each other.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate having a slider base 316a slidably supported at the left and right ends on the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left to the front from the front view center at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b capable of contacting the lower end of the downward extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313 with the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f extending through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and the slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward as it goes downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop portion 316d.

  In the upper tray bowling unit 310, when the tray unit 200 is assembled, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper inlet 315 c via the first guiding portion 315 d on the rear side of the base portion 315 a.

  Further, when the upper disc ball extracting button 239 is pressed downward, the push transmitting member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper disc ball extracting button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d pivots in the direction of moving downward about the shaft portion 313a. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing transmission member 313, the upper flat ball withdrawal slider 316's transmission piece 316b with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d abuts. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper ball ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316 c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315 d side is in communication with the second guide path 315 e side. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first induction passage 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second induction passage 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  In addition, when the downward pressing of the upper disc ball releasing button 239 is released, the upper disc ball extracting slider 316 and the upper disc ball removing button 239 are raised by the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1 i. Lower bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower countersink removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260. A flat-plate-shaped lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the extraction hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide over the lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 to close the opening 321a. , A knob attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front of the plate unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 in the position opening the opening 321a against the biasing force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower countersinking base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By mounting the lower tray ball removal base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower plate ball removal base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322 a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in a front view.

  The holding device 325 is provided with a main body 325a attached to the lower ball ball withdrawal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b which can be opened and closed from the main body 325a and can grip the holding projection 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b and holding the holding projections 322a. The claws 325b are kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the lower hole body 214a of the lower plate main body 214 in a state where the picker 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without being dropped downward from the ball removal holes 214 a.

  From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a communicate. As a result, the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 come out of the lower portion of the tray unit 200 through the ball holes 214a and the opening 321a, and the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob portion 323 is stopped. You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, slightly operating the knob 323 to the left opens the pair of holding claws 325b and releases the holding projections 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide cover 322 to the right. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower ball ball emptying unit 320, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 202, or the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 can be removed.

[3-1 j. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, etc., a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view in the rendering operation unit 220 and translucent. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, and a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; And a display section 334 which can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls into a bowl unit by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball lending button 332. 200 can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining amount of the rented portion is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1 k. Upper plate top decoration member]
The upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, etc., attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a translucent upper dish top lens An upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band by causing the LEDs of the upper dish top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper dish top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper dish top decorative member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper dish rear decoration member 236 and the linear luminous lens member 237. By making the light emitting decoration 340 possible, the player's interest can be attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the rendering operation unit 220 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

[3-1 l. Characteristic effects of dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of this embodiment is a game ball within the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 in accordance with the gaming state changing by typing in, the upper dish liquid-crystal display 244 has a strip shape along the outer peripheral edge on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) Light from the outside of the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. entering from the outside, and attracts the line of sight (interest) of the player to the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. Can. Therefore, when presenting effects such as an image according to the game state in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emission lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, thereby providing the player with the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and it is possible to enjoy the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance, it is arranged outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 being played, it is possible for the player to play the game in the game area 5a and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by giving attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed, and when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 by making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. It is possible to make the player pay attention and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on either of the gaming area 5a and the gaming area 5a, and may decrease interest, but the gaming state Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival), the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the light emission and the game within the game area 5a is enjoyed As the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and tired.

  In addition, since the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the dish unit 200 which bulges to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be easily concealed by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 becomes difficult to see from other players behind and behind the player. The effect presented by the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and decrease in interest by being scolded by another player when enjoying the effects by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and it is also possible to reduce the upper plate liquid crystal display device. The linear luminous lens member 237 or the like emits light at the time of presentation of the effect by 244, making it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like can be made more noticeable than in the case of emitting light in a dot shape. Can be made to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. easily, and enjoy the effects of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the touch panel 246 etc. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission aspect is different from the light emission of the other light emission decorative body etc. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at a position on the rear side close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of vision, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, there is provided the effect operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is struck in the game area 5a. The upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are turned when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201 since the player for checking the amount of game balls to be closed turns the line of sight at a certain frequency. It becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns the gaze toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the gaze from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display 244). Therefore, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the rendering operation unit 200 is disposed below the gaming area 5a, and light from the linear luminous lens member 237 or the like is emitted from the bottom to the player, therefore, it is disposed above the gaming area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to easily see the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., so that it becomes possible to make the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 pay attention to the player reliably. It is possible to enjoy the effect by the operation unit 200 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a, the center of the line of sight of the player is in any position in the game area 5a. However, it is possible to easily notice the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and enjoy the effect by the effect operation unit 200. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the rendering by the image, it is possible to perform rendering for causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player by various renderings. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to actively enjoy the effect for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) disposed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball emitting device 680). An upper tray ball extraction button 239 is disposed along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and operates the upper tray ball removal unit 310 with the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear luminous lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear luminous lens member 237 is disposed at a position which the player cares during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emission lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is drawn to the touch unit 220B and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 It is easy to notice the timing of touch operation etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 of the dish unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being disposed at a position higher than that of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air and Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows downward of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), the condensed water can be prevented from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating unit 242 in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state so that the vibration of the touch unit 220B (excitation device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B is vibrated. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of 246, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the sense of operation of the touch panel 246 for the player, it is surprising to be surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or suggests timing for operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to enjoy the operation effects by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B by tapping or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it becomes possible to absorb the impact etc., damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A etc. due to the impact etc can be reduced, and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B etc. Can prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the portion operated by the touch unit 220B, when the player operates, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the finger of the player, so that a sufficient feeling of operation can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest by the various effects. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared with the conventional pressing button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more various operation effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) immovably upward and movably downward, and the touch unit 220B is moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move while operating the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated properly. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it can make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B thought to not move is excited according to the gaming state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration exciter 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player in the touch panel 246 Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 operates a position different from the position to be operated by the player, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. As a result, the player can be made to perform the correct operation, and the enjoyment of the operation using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other are provided, the resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of the vibration of each vibration exciter 242 and the like. Can. Therefore, by controlling each excitation device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to impart a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side and an impact or load acts on the touch unit 220B, both left and right sides of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B. Further, on the unit case 231 side, the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, so that an impact or load from the touch unit 220 B side via the unit case 231 can be applied to the mounting base 230. It can be distributed widely and transmitted. At this time, of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 Since a gap is formed between the inner circumferential wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving protrusion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward by an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the deflection or the like of the unit case 231 transmits the impact or the like to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 As a result, the force in the direction (downward) perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting base 230 to be bent is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side, the shocks and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B or Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the door cover of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 55 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fowl cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 55 (b) is an exploded perspective view with the lid removed and the fal cover unit seen from behind. Further, FIG. 56 is a front view of the fowl cover unit with the lid member removed.

  The fowl cover unit 520 of this embodiment is attached to the front of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side as shown in the figure. And a flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 is a penetrating ball which penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and brings the normal induction passage 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. A channel 526, and a full ball receiving opening 528 opened rearward as viewed from the right side of the through ball passage 526 and in communication with a full channel guiding portion 862 of the lower full ball channel unit 860 of the main body frame 4; Is equipped.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 528, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball ball receiving port 530 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball socket 528 and the ball ball socket 530 And a ball discharge port 532 in communication with the lower ball and ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving hole 528 and the far ball receiving hole 530 and the ball discharging hole 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524 to store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, movable A full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 biasing the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 520, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, they are stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. Number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 by the weight of the gaming balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 535, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 202 be filled up.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 526 on the rear side of the unit main body 522, and a door opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 860 in the dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening and closing contact portion 537 capable of being in contact with the operation projection 863e of 863 is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening and closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 537 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guide path door member 863 abuts. When the operation projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing portion 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 537, the guide path door member 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 ) Can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side and the door frame 3 is closed It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 and door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 is attached, which locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the body frame base 600. A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  Further, the main unit frame 4 has a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and front and rear in the front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 And a cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a bass speaker of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view And a circular opening for the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forwardly. And have.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board insertion slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end. And a rear extension 608. The body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in a front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge for attaching the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably mounted at a position slightly lower on the left side from the left and right center of the gaming board placement portion 602 in the opening cover 615 closing the connection opening 606 so as to open and close. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the body frame 4.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. In the main frame side upper hinge member 620, a portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates up and down at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the lower hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the lower hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 of the main body lower hinge member 640 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 530 of the lower far cover unit 520 and is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the inside of the far cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting backward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically from the lower part of the unit base 701 forward from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks locking of either the door frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703 according to the turning direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 70 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 70 (a). Further, FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is opened by the ball drawing movable piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 73 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . Further, FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between the fowl cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank passage unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper portion of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And have. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 201 in the tray unit 200. The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of a full tank induction passage 862 guiding to the full tank reception hole 530, and the front end opening of the normal guidance passage 861 and the full tank guidance passage 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the partition plate 823 penetrate both front and rear ends to the front case 821 and the rear race 822 A rod-like shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece members 825 and 826 rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively And a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821d to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822 e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822 f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822 d to the left and right of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece front 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a row The lower dispensing device 830 can be guided back and forth in two rows by 822 (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 respectively, and also the movable piece front 825 and the movable Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the single member back 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece front 825 Alternatively, the movable piece 825a, 826a of the movable piece member 826 is rotated so as to protrude into the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the detection piece 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball is lost is detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 . Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c The weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 and the weight of the weight can be used to attach the movable piece 825a by attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the gaming ball. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guiding path 821c, 822c is provided with the introduction portion 822d for guiding the gaming ball toward the movable piece 825a, 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable piece 825a, 825c protrudes inside. Since the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a by the game balls flowing in the passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831. It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right in front view, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the back box 832 and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected with the connection part 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831 d and 832 d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-folded portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blades 839 b and 839 c. In addition, it is not discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer side of the main portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main portion 843c And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60 (b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction on the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passages 381 e and 832 e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removal movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, the ball removing movable piece 843 is used to remove the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, and the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a is located directly below the dispensing outlet 831b of the dispensing device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b is It is located directly below the ball outlet 831 c of the dispenser 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-ball passage unit Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and can not store the gaming balls, and the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball passage unit 860 is filled with gaming balls, the game is released normally. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 202 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 201 in accordance with the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank induction passage 862 for guiding the gaming balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end; A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 537.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full-tan ball passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is a through ball passage 526 in the far cover unit 520 of the door frame 3; It is attached at a position opposite to the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 78). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end surface of the operation projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863. The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is open (see FIG. 78 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full A through ball passage 526 and a full ball receiving hole 528 of the far cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving hole 528 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 becomes full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 201. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower tray 202 through the foul cover unit 520. Thereafter, when a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and can not supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of the Then, when the movable piece 534 is rotated by the game ball being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the far cover unit 520, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535. In the upstream storage passage 533, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 57 thru | or FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and having the power supply board housed therein, and the back side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled An interface control board box 940 in which the boards are accommodated, and a payout control board mounted over the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls is accommodated. And a box 950.

  The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view of a front component and a front unit on the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player Attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by the second game, it is possible to receive the game ball according to the result of the second lottery, and the first special game lottery by receiving the game ball to the first game opening 2002 or the second game machine 2004 The first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided, in each of which a game ball can be accepted according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second large winning opening 2006 is configured by two large winning openings of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b disposed in one flow path through which the game balls circulate (see FIG. See 87).

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the right and left direction in the technique area 5a, and has the first start port 2002 and the first big winning port 2005, and the start port unit 2100 The lower side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the mouth unit 2100 and having the three general winning openings 2001 and the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A frame shaped like a side unit upper 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006 which are attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a. The center character 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a lock attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 for removably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in a front view in the back box 3010 and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center character 2500; It is attached near the front end of the front view lower right corner in the back box 3010, and the second big winning opening 2006 and the second of the center character 2500 Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is rotatably mounted on the upper relay substrate 3040 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay substrate cover 3041 covering the back side of the upper relay substrate 3040, and the back surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect driving board box 3042, effect driving board 3043 accommodated in effect driving board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay substrate cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the cover.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 which penetrates in the front and back direction in a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, in the panel holder 1120, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes are formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1111 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 85).

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and 142. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail but two LEDs based on the status display consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and the normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball against the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in the lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after fluctuating display of the normal symbol by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Of the two, a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending displays, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, and the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by Of the first special symbol display for displaying the LED of the first special lottery result in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result, and of the variation display of the first special symbol pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 By the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending that is the number of the variable display that does not hold the start condition, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning) The second special symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of eight LEDs based on the second special lottery result that has been drawn, and then the eight special LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result Among the variable display of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second display opening 2004, the symbol display and the number of holdings which is the number of the variable display for which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied yet L When the second special hold number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 It mainly comprises a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying (the number of rounds).

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 142). reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side in the front view. And 1602. In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in the frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lower the locking mechanism 3020 It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, which can receive game balls in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results.

  Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a in a front view. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the gaming area 5 a is disposed immediately above the second start opening 2004. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed above the first large winning opening 2005 on the right side in a front view of the first starting opening 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the second large winning opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 is a second upper large winning opening 2006a and a second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the gaming balls circulate. It is composed of In the second large winning opening 2006, the second upper large winning opening 2006a is disposed near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a. It is located on the left and down.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the right and left direction in the technique area 5a, and has the first start port 2002 and the first big winning port 2005, and the start port unit 2100 The lower side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the mouth unit 2100 and having the three general winning openings 2001 and the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A frame shaped like a side unit upper 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006 which are attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a. The center character 2500 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a front perspective view of the starting opening unit in the front unit, and FIG. 88 (b) is a rear perspective view of the starting opening unit. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first big winning opening 2005.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat unit base 2101 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction and having a first large winning opening 2005 penetrating in the front and back direction, and a first unit base 2101 A ball receiving portion 2102 which protrudes forward from an upper portion substantially in the left-right direction above the large winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101 and has a first starting opening A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the gaming ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding portion 2103 and detecting the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002, and And a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first prize winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first large winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end has the same size as the first large winning opening 2005 and opens forward. A horizontally-long rectangular flat-plate-shaped first winning opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first large winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attachment solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first large winning opening door member 2112, and a member attached in the unit case 2111 and received by the first large winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting the game ball and the upper surface of the unit case 2111 are attached. The first opening unit relay board 2115 relaying the connection between the mouthpiece sensor 2104, the first attachment solenoid, and the first large winning hole sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, and the lower portion of the unit case 2111 A starting opening unit decoration substrate (not shown) for emitting and decorating the winning opening 2005 is provided.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting opening 2002 is open upward in a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is opened forward in a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) gaming balls to be received at one time.

  In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening It is determined in 2002 that the game ball has been accepted. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent action due to the insertion of a fraudulent tool into the first starting port 2002.

  In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attachment unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first opening winning opening door member 2112 of the first attachment unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 and closes the first big winning hole 2005. The first big winning opening door member 2112 is mounted upright by closing the first big winning opening 2005 by the unit case 2111 at the left and right ends of the lower side, and the upper side is the front. The first large winning opening 2005 can be opened from the closed state by rotating it so as to move downward.

  The first winning opening port door member 2112 of the first attachment unit 2110 is upright in the normal state (the first attachment solenoid 2113 is in the non-energized state) to close the first winning hole port 2005. Then, when the first attachment solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the state of being located. That is, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is inclined to be higher from the lower side of the first large winning opening 2005 to the front.

  In this state, when the gaming ball flows down the front of the first large winning opening 2005 and contacts the first large winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the gaming ball is from below due to the inclination of the first large winning opening door member 2112 It changes backward and is accepted by the first large winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The gaming balls received in the first big winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2114.

[5-8b. Lower side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit. The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is a flat unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2201 It communicates with the three ball receiving portions 2202 which are open at the rear and each forms the general winning hole 2001 and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201 And a hook portion 2203 for guiding the gaming ball received by the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 project from the front surface of the unit base 2201 apart from each other to the left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a size that can receive only one game ball at a time.

  With the lower side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side in the front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the upper side unit 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1112 by the hooks 2203 respectively. The gaming ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning hole sensor 3015 mounted in the back lower left ball induction unit 3505 in the back lower movable executability unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 125). Is detected and discharged downward.

5-8 c. On the side unit]
Next, the side unit upper 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a.

  The upper side unit 2300 has a flat unit base 2301 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and a shelf 2302 projecting forward from the front of the unit base 2301 and extending left and right so that the right end in the front view is low. And have. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

  With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf 2302 approaches the inner rail 1002, and the gaming ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is right by the shelf 2302 It can be induced to the direction (the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a).

[5-8 d. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the center part of the front unit, and FIG. 91 is a rear perspective view of the center part of the front unit. Further, FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the flow path on the right side in the center product in cross section. Further, FIG. 93 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attachment unit in the center product, and FIG. 93 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F in FIG.

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize from the front the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000, etc. it can. The center product 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006.

  The center character 2500 is a flat frame-like flange 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening 1112 that penetrates widely at the center of the panel plate 1112 and the front from the flange 2511 A frame shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 which protrudes to prevent the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 which protrudes backward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112 A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the position of the front circumferential wall 2512 is slightly highest on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is a warp entrance 2520 in which the game balls in the game area 5a are opened so that the game balls in the game area 5a can enter on the outer peripheral surface of the front circumferential wall 2512 of the center base 2510. A warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball entering the warp inlet 2520 to the lower end of the left side in the front circumferential wall 2512 and a game ball circulated through the warp passage 2521 can be released and headed backward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521 The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) opened and the gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2522 to the center side in the left and right direction along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510 behind the flange portion 2511 The guiding path 2523 to be guided and the gaming ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in front view And a stage 2530 that extends laterally along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left and right direction and rolls the supplied game ball in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. Have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends of the front view left and right are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the bulge between the lowest parts is slightly higher It's out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape with a gentle slope. The stage 2530 is formed at the top of a slightly higher portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is lowered toward the front and is a fan-shaped central guiding portion 2531 which spreads slightly to the left and right; And fan-shaped side guide portions 2532 which are respectively formed at the lowermost two portions on both the left and right sides of the and which become lower toward the front and expand to the left and the right.

  The stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the gaming area 5a when the gaming board 5 is assembled, and the gaming ball supplied to the stage 2530 through the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the central guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and is returned (returned back) into the gaming area 5a again. In the stage 2530, when the gaming board 5 is assembled, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly below the central guiding portion 2531 and the gaming ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 into the gaming area 5a. , Very likely to be accepted in the first starting port 2002.

  In the center character 2500, as shown in FIG. 92, a portion of the front circumferential wall 2512 extends downward substantially vertically from the right end in the front view to the vicinity of the approximate center in the vertical direction on the upper side of the center base 2510. Front wall with the right end side slightly lower to the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000) with the gaming board 5 assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall 2512a and the upper right vertical wall 2512a An upper right lateral wall 2512b in which a portion of the portion 2512 extends to the right, and a right falling wall in which a portion of the front peripheral wall 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right lateral wall to substantially the same height as the stage 2530 2512 c, and a lower right lateral wall 2512 d in which a part of the front peripheral wall 2512 extends leftward so as to be slightly lower toward the center in the left-right direction from the lower end of the right falling wall 2512 c It is equipped with a.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is formed in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 on the outer peripheral side of the upper right vertical wall 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall 2512b, and the upper right distribution space 2541 where game balls can flow, The gaming ball is formed below the lower right lateral wall 2512d, communicating with the right flow passage 2542 in communication with the right flow passage 2542 and communicating with the right flow passage 2542. And a lower right circulation space 2543 which can be circulated and can communicate with the game area 5a. The right hitting distribution area 2540 in the gaming area 5a is formed by the upper right distribution space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543.

  The upper right distribution space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size in which the dimensions in the vertical and horizontal directions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball can flow down along a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the lower end portion extending vertically downward extends obliquely to the lower left in the front view, and the width in the lateral direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the gaming ball The game ball can be made to flow down in a line in the vertical direction.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 extends leftward from right below the part communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end in the front view becomes lower, and then opens a second attack passage 2543a opening leftward; A discharge passage 2543b communicating with the right end in front view of the two-attachment passage 2543a and extending downward, and a game ball can pass through the flange portion 2511 at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and open backward And a second outlet 2543c. The second attachment passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose height in the vertical direction is about twice the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the left and right dimensions of the discharge passage 2543b are outside the gaming ball The passage is a little wider than the diameter. In the lower right distribution space 2543, when assembled on the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attachment passage 2543a is the first start opening 2002 and the first large opening in the front view left of the start opening unit 2100. The game ball is released from the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball entering the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and returned to the inside of the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being interrupted.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is open at the front as a whole, and extends from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right vertical wall 2512 a and the upper right lateral wall 2512 b at the lower half of the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by the part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a plate-like transparent right front decorative plate 2544 which extends forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right falling wall 2512 c in a front view and the rear is the right falling wall It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 which extends downward from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall 2512 d at the front, and the rear is lower right lateral wall It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512 d.

  The center product 2500 projects into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543, and includes a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately project at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 in the flow direction of the game ball. In the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542, the spacing between the deceleration ribs 2546 is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the gaming ball on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed narrower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right flow passage 2542, the gaming balls always flow downward in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be exerted against acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately project at predetermined intervals from the mutually opposing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 in the distribution direction of the game ball . The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 are set such that the distance between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball between the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side There is. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed narrower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, even in the lower right distribution space 2543, the gaming balls always flow downward in a zig-zag fashion, thereby reducing the distribution speed of the gaming balls and preventing the distribution speed of the gaming balls from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, a gate unit 2003, and a second starting opening 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 has a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

  More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending to the right in the front view from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a, and one gaming ball is It is formed to be able to pass in the vertical direction only. A gate sensor 2547 for detecting passage of the game ball is attached to the gate unit 2003. The gate unit 2003 is arranged slightly leftward in a front view with respect to a position immediately below the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center work 2500 project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 closing the lower half of the upper right circulation space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. It is prepared for. More specifically, the center character 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 at the upper end is formed in a container shape opened upward and rearward, and directly below the general winning opening 2001. The lower end of the ball receiving member 2548 formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens toward the left on the left side surface in a front view, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 A second start opening door member 2549 rotatably mounted and closing the second start opening 2004 so as to open and close and a rear surface of the flange portion 2511 drive the second start opening door member 2549 to open and close. A starting opening solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142) and a second starting opening sensor 2551 for detecting gaming balls received by the second starting opening 2004. It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center character 2500 is opened in a size such that only one game ball can be received upwards right below the gate portion 2003 in a front view right direction. The gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged rearward of the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center role 2500 in the right side in a front view.

  The second start opening 2004 opens rightward from the front view right below the general winning opening 2001, and the second start opening door member 2549 is opened to the left by turning counterclockwise from the front view It becomes possible to receive the game ball. The external shape of the second starting opening door member 2549 has a base end circle forming a lower portion in the front view, and two sides extending from one point outside the base end circle to contact the base end circle. And so-called "droplet-like", and is rotatably mounted at the center of the base circle.

  In the normal state, the second start opening 2004 is deenergized with the start opening solenoid 2550, and the second start opening door member 2549 is in the upright state in which the distal end side is positioned approximately directly above the base circle. The second starting opening door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball can not be received. Then, when the starting opening solenoid 2550 is energized according to the result of the normal drawing selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the front end side of the second starting opening door member 2549 moves to the left in front view Then, the second start opening door member 2549 is rotated, and the rotation is stopped in a state where the tip end side is slightly high. As a result, the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received. In the state where the second start opening door member 2549 is pivoted and opened, the tip end of the second start opening door member 2549 substantially matches the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  After being guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, the gaming ball received in the second starting opening 2004 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2551 and discharged downward.

  The second large winning opening 2006 is arranged to open upward at the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543 a in the lower right circulation space 2543. In detail, the second upper winning opening 2006a constituting the second large winning opening 2006 opens upward at the right end in the front view in the second attachment passage 2543a, and similarly, the second large winning opening The second lower large winning opening 2006b constituting the opening 2006 is opened upward at the left side and the lower side of the second upper large winning opening 2006a in the second attachment passage 2543a. The width of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is formed in the range of three to four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The center product 2500 is slidably supported by the center base 2510 in the front-rear direction so as to be able to open and close the second upper large winning opening 2006a opening upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511 It is attached on the rear surface of the center base 2510 and a flat second upper winning prize port door member 2552 which is projected so as to project forward and close the second upper big winning hole 2006a and is inclined so that the left end in front view is low. The second upper winning solenoid 2553 for opening and closing the second upper big winning opening door member 2552, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received by the second upper winning opening 2006a (FIG. 142 And the front and back sides of the center base 2510 so as to enable opening and closing of the second lower large winning opening 2006b opening upward. The second flat-plate-like second plate which is supported so as to be slidable toward the front and whose front end projects forward of the front face of the flange portion 2511 to close the second lower large winning opening 2006b and lowers the left end in front view The second lower attack solenoid 2556 attached to the lower large winning opening door 2555 and the rear surface of the center base 2510 to open and close the second lower large winning opening door 2555, and accepted by the second lower large winning opening 2006b And a second lower winning opening sensor 2557 (see FIG. 142) for detecting the game ball.

  In addition, the center character 2500 extends in the left-right direction straddling between the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 A flat plate-like cross-plate portion 2558 which is inclined so that the left end side of the view is lower and which forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 A flat discharge plate 2559 extends in the left-right direction so that the left end is low from the front end left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a. And have. The transverse plate portion 2558 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction in a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. The release plate portion 2559 is formed to have a length of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  In the second attachment passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows in the left-right direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball It is set up. In the second attachment passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, from the upstream side of the flow of gaming balls, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten speed reduction ribs 2546 including a fifth speed reduction rib 2546e, a sixth speed reduction rib 2546f, a seventh speed reduction rib 2546g, an eighth speed reduction rib 2546h, a ninth speed reduction rib 2546i, and a tenth speed reduction rib 2546j are provided. An odd-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and an even-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, and the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is disposed slightly to the right of the left end in the front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is disposed on the left side of the left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a in a front view, in the vicinity of the right end of the bridge portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the transition plate portion 2558. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is disposed on the right side of the right end of the second lower large winning opening 2006b in a front view, in the vicinity of the left end of the bridge portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is disposed on the left side of the right end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is disposed on the right in the front view in the left-right direction center of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is disposed on the left in the front view in the left-right direction center of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is disposed to the right of the left end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the release plate 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546 j is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the release plate 2559.

  Of the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first deceleration rib 2546a to the ninth deceleration rib 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 The even numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a to near the ceiling (see FIG. 93A).

  Of the even-numbered decelerating ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second decelerating rib 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, respectively As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end at the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 Above the upper surface of the lower decelerating rib 2546, and is separated from the lower end of the other decelerating rib 2546 by a larger distance. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance as the outer diameter of the gaming ball from the front end left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, respectively. , Are formed to be separated.

  As a result, when the second upper winning opening 2006a or the second lower opening 2006b moves from the open state where the game ball can be received to the closed state where it can not receive the game ball, the second upper winning hole slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower large winning opening door member 2555, the front view left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a or the front view left end of the second lower large winning opening 2006b, and the second reduction rib 2546b It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

  In the state where the second upper winning prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning prize opening door member 2555 are projected forward to close the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b, In a state where the second upper winning prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning prize opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 or the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second reduction rib 2546b or the eighth reduction rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball The game ball which is narrower than the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 and the upper surface of the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 (rolls) is the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. And a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  The center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 from the center of the upper side of the front circumferential wall 2512 from the approximate center in the left-right direction to the right in front view, and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000) ), And a space having a width allowing only one game ball to flow is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be hit in the front view right with respect to the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center character 2500 (so-called, hit right), the center in the game area 5a A game ball can be distributed in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the character 2500 in a front view.

  Further, in the assembled state on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the left and lower of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game balls driven into the game area 5a circulate downward through various paths by abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like on the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like viewed from the back.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a lock attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 for removably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in a front view in the back box 3010 and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center character 2500; It is attached near the front end of the front view lower right corner in the back box 3010, and the second big winning opening 2006 and the second of the center character 2500 Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center character 2500 to the bottom in the back box 3010, and then laterally central along the bottom. After being guided to the vicinity, the sheet is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game balls received by the second large winning opening 2006 and the second out port 2543c of the center character 2500 along the bottom in the back box 3010 to the left in front view, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the back view above the opening 3010 a at the back surface of the back box 3010 and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the back of the back up left movable effect unit 3200 The upper relay substrate 3040 relaying the connection with the upper left decorative substrate 3253, the upper relay substrate cover 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay substrate 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect driving board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010 a and an effect driving board box 3042 housed in the effect driving board box 3042 from the peripheral control board 1510 Right view from the rear surface of back box 3010 and effect drive board 3043 which drives each drive motor, decoration board etc. based on control command A panel relay board 3044, which is attached at a corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each winning hole sensor, each solenoid, etc., and a rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay substrate cover 3045 attached.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. And two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side in rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Moreover, although the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the boss | hub for attaching each movable presentation unit etc., an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the back box 3010 in the position suitably.

[5-9b. Back left inside decoration unit]
Next, the back left inside decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 96 and FIG. The back left inside decoration unit 3050 is attached near the front end on the upper side from the center in the vertical direction in the front view left side in the back box 3010. The back left inside decoration unit 3050 has a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010, and an attachment that is attached to the front of the unit base 3051 to form a decoration that three-dimensionally simulates the "middle layer" of mahjong. A back left middle decoration body 3052 having a light transmitting property, a back left middle decoration substrate 3053 attached between the back left middle decoration body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; Is equipped.

  The back left inside decoration unit 3050 can emit light and decorate the back left inside decoration body 3052 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left inside decoration substrate 3053.

[5-9c. Back and back movable production unit]
Next, the back and bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable presentation unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the back-to-back back movable presentation unit. FIG. 100 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back and back movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 100 (b) is a disassembled back and back back movable presentation unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the back and back movable presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the first back body and the back second back decoration, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view seen from the back with it disassembles and it is a back decoration with a first decoration and a back decoration second decoration. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the back and back movable presentation unit from the front. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the normal state, and FIG. 104 (b) is a rotation of the first back-to-back decoration and the back-to-back second decoration together from the normal state. It is a front view in a state where the second decorative surface of the second decorative body is directed to the front, and (c) is the back of the first decorative body and the lower back second decorative member in the state of (b) Is a front view in a state where it is moved to the moving end on the left side in a front view. In FIG. 105 (d), the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together in the state of FIG. 104 (c) to form the first decorative surface of the first decorative body. (E) is a front view of the state directed to the front, and the first decoration is rotated from the state of (d) to the back and back to open the first decoration and the second decoration at the back. It is a front view in a state where the second decorative surface of the first back surface and the second decorative surface of the second back surface are directed to the front.

  The back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front of the back wall below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back and back movable presentation unit 3100 is supported by the back and forth back first decorative body 3110 coaxially with the vertically extending axial line on one side extending up and down. A rotary drive unit 3130 having a second rear decoration 3120, a lower back lower first decorative body and a lower back rear second decoration attached to the hinge rotatably and capable of separately driving the respective rotation, and a rotary drive unit 3130 And a slide unit 3150 slidably mounted in the left and right direction and mounted in the back box 3010, and a back and rear fixed decoration 3160 attached to the front of the slide unit 3150.

  The first decorative surface 3110 includes a first decorative surface 3111 and a second decorative surface 3112 which are disposed opposite to each other and are formed to be different from each other and have different light transmission properties, and the first decorative surface. A thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 supporting the 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 so as to face each other, and the first decorative body main body 3113 are attached, and the display screen is The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from one decorative surface 3111, and the side contacting the second decorative surface 3112 of the four sides of the rectangular first decorative body main body 3113 that extend vertically And two first hinges 3115 that can be supported so as to rotate about an axis extending up and down, and a first decorative body between the sub liquid crystal display 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112 Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces the front from the inside of the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character of "Holy" is given. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the periphery control substrate 1510.

  The two first hinges 3115 are vertically spaced and coaxially attached. The first hinges 3115 are hinge-rotatably supported by the second hinges 3124 of the back-rear second decorative body 3120. The back and first back decoration substrate can emit light and decorate the first decoration surface 3111 and the second decoration surface 3112 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

  The back and back second decorative body 3120 is disposed opposite to each other, is formed with different decorations, and has a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 having translucency, and a first decorative surface. A rectangular solid second decorative body main body 3123 supporting the thin film 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 so as to face each other, and four extending in the vertical direction in the rectangular solid second decorative body main body 3123 It projects outward from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 of the sides, and rotates the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 back and forth around the axis extending up and down. A decorative body projecting cylindrically downward from the lower ends of the three second hinges 3124 which can be supported and spaced up and down and the lowermost second hinge 3124 of the three second hinges 3124 Support shaft 3125, The second decoration body side operation gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decoration body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decoration body support shaft 3125, and the outer periphery of the decoration body support shaft 3125 Between the first detection surface 3121 and the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 in the second decoration body 3123 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides And a second decorative substrate (not shown).

  The first decorative surface 3121 of the back and back second decorative body 3120 is formed with a decoration on which vertical writing "Nunkin" is applied. The second decorative surface 3122 of the back and back second decorative body 3120 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character of "Holy" is given. The second decoration main body 3123 of the back bottom back second decoration 3120 is formed to have a size substantially equal to that of the first decoration main body 3113 of the back bottom back first decoration 3110. That is, the outer dimensions of the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3122 of the back bottom back second decoration 3120 are the same. It is formed in substantially the same size.

  The three second hinge portions 3124 of the back second back body 3120 are vertically separated and coaxially attached, respectively, and the back second back portion 1124 is attached between the second hinge portions 3124. First hinges 3115 of 3110 are positioned and hingedly attached to each other. Thus, the back-to-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 are closed with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 facing each other by hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface to each other It can rotate (hinge rotation) between the open state in which 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 are substantially coplanar. Then, in the state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are opened, the second decoration faces 3112 and 3122 sandwich the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 to each other. It will be lined up, and each decoration will unite and the character of "holy" will appear. Although detailed illustration is omitted for the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the respective first decorative surfaces 3111 and 311 in the back rear first decoration 3110 and the back rear second decoration 3120. A decoration corresponding to the decoration given to 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 is given, and when the first decoration 3110 for back and back and the second decoration 3120 for back and back are opened, The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are made inconspicuous.

  At the upper end portion of the decoration support shaft 3125, the rotation transmitting member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 is rotatable so as to hinge-rotate the first decoration 3110 at the upper back and the second decoration 3120 at the lower back and the second decoration. Be inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotational drive unit base 3131 in the rotational drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the heights of the first decorative surface 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122. Furthermore, specifically, it is formed in 80%-90% of length. As a result, by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, even if the back heavy rear lower first decorative body 3110 etc. is eccentric on one side extending up and down and hinge rotation is possible, the back rear first The decorative body 3110 or the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the second decoration-side operation gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a that protrudes beyond the gear teeth at one location on the outer periphery, and can not rotate once. The back and back second decoration substrate of the back and back second decorative body 3120 can emit and decorate the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3122 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3100 has a box shape open at the front side and rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 and is rotatably mounted to the slide unit 3150 in the lateral direction. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a rotatably supported by a rotary drive unit base 3131 and rotatably mounted on the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, projecting upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a A connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, a first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over a half circumference around the lower end portion outer periphery of the sleeve portion 3132a, and one of the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c It has a first detection piece 3132 d extending outward from the end Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  In addition, the rotational drive unit 3130 is a spur gear-like first drive gear 3133 meshing with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132 c of the rotation transmission member 3132 and a back rear first drive motor for driving the first drive gear 3133 3134, the first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first back drive 3134 is attached and mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 and the second decoration side operation gear 3126 of the second back decoration 3120 are engaged A second drive gear 3136 in the form of a spur gear, a back and back second drive motor 3137 for driving the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, and a back and back second drive motor 3137 are mounted and in the rotation drive unit base 3131 And a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be mounted.

  Furthermore, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132 d of the rotation transfer member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and capable of detecting the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 at the back and bottom.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the back bottom first decoration substrate, the back bottom second decoration substrate, the back bottom first drive motor 3134, The rotary drive unit relay board 3141 relaying the connection between the back lower second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140 and the back lower relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150 , Further equipped.

  Further, the rotational drive unit 3130 is a flat unit cover 3142 closing the front surface of the rotational drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a attached to the lower surface of the rotational drive unit base 3131 and elongated horizontally, and a rack gear And a rack member 3143 having a flat-plate shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end in a front view of 3143a.

  The rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130 is a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped, and a main portion 3131a in which the decoration support shaft 3125, the back bottom first drive motor 3134, the back bottom second drive motor 3137, etc. And a sub-portion 3131b which is disposed substantially to the left of the main portion 3131a in a front view as viewed from the main portion 3131a and has a substantially half height of the main portion 3131a and in which the rotary drive unit relay substrate 3141 is accommodated. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottoms aligned.

  Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131 c and a lower bearing portion 3131 d which are open at the front end side and notched toward the rear on the top plate portion and bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131 a. . The upper bearing portion 3131 c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132 a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131 d is recessed downward from above and does not penetrate up and down, and the bearing member 3127 of the back second rear decoration 3120 is inserted. The open front end sides of the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d are closed by a unit cover 3142.

  The lower back rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The lower back rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

  The back-to-back first drive motor 3134 rotates the first drive gear 3133 to rotate the first drive gear 3133, thereby rotating the first drive gear 3133 together with the first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmitting member 3132 , The back and forth back first decoration 3110 can be rotated. On the other hand, the lower back rear second drive motor 3137 rotates the second drive gear 3136 to rotate the second drive gear 3136 so that the second decoration side actuating gear 3126 at the lower end of the decoration support shaft 3125 meshing with the second drive gear 3136 The back and back second decoration 3120 can be rotated together with the decoration support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 is attached to a box-shaped unit base 3151 attached in the back box 3010 and opened forward and upward, and attached to the upper part in the unit base 3151 The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted on the front surface, and the slide guide 3152 extending in the left and right direction is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction substantially in the left and right direction in the unit base 3151 A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a meshing with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-like driven gear 3153b which is integrally rotated with the pinion gear 3153a and larger in diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 engaged with the driven gear 3153 b of the transmission gear member 3153; a back lower third drive motor 3155 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151 to rotationally drive the drive gear 3154; A slide detection sensor 3156 mounted in 3151 and detecting a detection piece 3143 b of the rack member 3143 in the rotational drive unit 3130 and a substantially lower half of a front open portion of the unit base 3151 are closed to It has a horizontal flat flat slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a back rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 slidably supports the rotational drive unit 3130 in the left-right direction. The lower back third drive motor 3155 rotationally drives the drive gear 3154 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 meshing with the drive unit 3130.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 (a) etc., in the normal state, the back and forth movable presentation unit 3100 has the rotary drive unit 3130 positioned at the right end in front view with respect to the left and right slide directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in the normal state, the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are in a state in which the second decoration faces 3112 and 3122 face each other and are closed, The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed forward. In this normal state, the back and forth back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are positioned on the right side with respect to the axis of hinge rotation (decorative body support axis 3125) extending up and down. doing. Also, in the normal state, the side opposite to the side of the back of the first decorative body 3110 and the back second back of the second decorative body 3120 that is rotatably supported by the hinge is the decorative body. The whole is rotated so as to be located forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal state, the back and back first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are rotated approximately 20 degrees in a clockwise direction in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotational drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. In the normal state, the first detection piece 3132 d of the rotation transfer member 3132 in the rotational drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the back side first rear body 3110 is in a state where detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Furthermore, in the normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 in the back and back second decoration 3120 is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  Moreover, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 etc., in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back bottom back first back of the first decoration 3110 facing the front (front) of the movable decoration unit 3100 The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located at the lower front corner of the center character 2500 in the front right corner of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and on the player side From this, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side of the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are positioned forward of the center of hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined to face the vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100.

  In this normal state, the second drive gear 3136, the second decoration body side operation gear 3126, and the decoration support shaft 3125 are driven by the second drive motor 3137 of the second drive motor 3137 under the second rotation drive unit 3130. It is closed when the second decorative body 3120 is turned in plan view clockwise direction (160 degrees) so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the back of the decorative body 3120 faces the front. The back of the second decoration 3120 located in front of the second decoration 3120 is pressed by the second decoration 3120 by the second decoration 3120 and is rotated together, and the back of the back is decorated with "good luck" The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 faces the front (see FIG. 104 (b)). Further, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110, which has been facing the front in the normal state, is in the state of facing rearward and becomes invisible from the player side. From this state, any of the back and back first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 can not be further rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, which rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 behind the back, is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125, which rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120, is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction in a front view by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position of the left end in a front view together with the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 via 3143a. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in a front view in a state assembled to the game board 5, an axis extending in the vertical direction of the hinge rotation (center line of the decoration support axis 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which it is slid to the position of the left end in a front view in the state shown in FIG. 104 (b). 105 (d) is moved to the position at the left end in the front view in the state of FIG. 104 (a), and the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member are driven by driving the first drive motor 3134 behind the back. The first decorative body 3110 is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view through the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connection portion 3132b of 3132 to perform the back lower first decorative body A state in which the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 is directed to the front, or from the state of FIG. 104 (c) by driving the first drive motor 3134. Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the back and back first decoration 3110 is rotated together with the first decoration 3110 and the second decoration 3120 is rotated to turn the first decoration 3110 One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the second back body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by driving the second back drive motor 3137, or FIG. In the state of (d), when the back bottom first decoration 3110 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise in plan view by driving the back bottom first drive motor 3134, as shown in FIG. 105 (e). After the second decorative surface 3112 of the first back body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second back body 3120 are folded to face each other, they are hinge-rotated to back The first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decorative body 3120 are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are aligned in the left and right direction and face the front.

  In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 310 are compared with the time when they are superimposed on each other and the back back first decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 310. The respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back second back decoration 3120 are arranged side by side, so that the face of the decoration formed by the back back first decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 is The size can be doubled, and it can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by the appearance of the large decoration. Further, in the state of FIG. 105 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back side first decoration 3110 and the back side second decoration 3120 are integrated, and the character of "holy" is Decoration will be visible. The first hinge 3115 and the second hinge 3124 of the first back body 3110 and the second back body 3120 have first and second decoration faces 3111 and 3121 and second and third decoration faces 3112 and 3122 respectively. A decoration corresponding to the decoration given is given, and when the first back body 3110 and the second back body 3120 are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are provided. Can be made inconspicuous, making it possible for the player to visually recognize the character of "holy" in a good state.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, in the integrated decoration formed by the first decorative body 3110 in the back and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the second decoration 3120 in the back, A cut-out decoration 3170 like "one" is formed. The cut out decoration 3170 is formed by cutting out a part of a character or pattern, and on the upper side of the cut out decoration 3170, the back up left first decoration body 3210 of the back up left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cut out decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 are positioned side by side, the whole of the character of "sparrow" is completed (See Figure 134).

  As described above, according to the back bottom and back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back bottom back first decoration body 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration body 3120 are closed to each other from each other by overlapping each other's faces. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and opened, the surface of the decoration by the back-to-back first decoration 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 is enlarged (expanded) in the front view gaming area 5a ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which are closed and can not be seen from the player side can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first back of the first decorative body 3110 and the second back of the second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In the state (see FIG. 105 (d)), the first back of the first decorative body 3110 is rotated to be aligned with the left side of the second decorative body 3120 in the front view, the first back of the first decorative body is back first. The decoration area that was only the first decoration surface 3111 of 3110 becomes two of the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 so as to extend leftward. While the area of decoration is doubled, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which have not been seen before are visible from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Alternatively, with the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 closed and the back back first decoration 3121 of the second decoration 3120 facing forward (FIG. 104 (c) Refer to), when the back and back second decoration 3120 is rotated and aligned to the right of the front view first decoration 3110 in the back and back, the first back only of the back and back second decoration 3120 only at the first decoration surface 3121 The area of the decoration is doubled so that the area of the decoration becomes two, the back and forth first decoration 3110 and the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back second decoration 3120 so as to extend rightward. As a result, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which were not visible until now become visible from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Thus, by opening from the state where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are opened, the decoration range by the back back first decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 The game can be expanded and the decoration can be changed, so that the player can have a strong impact, and the player's attention is given to the first decoration 3110 and the second decoration 2120. While being able to attract strongly and enjoy the decoration spread by the back decoration first decoration 3110 and the back decoration second decoration 3120, making the player think that something good may be done It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Also, in a state where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are superimposed on each other and closed, the back back first decoration 3110 and back back second decoration 3120 are put together. If it is rotated, the first decoration 3110 on the back and the second decoration 3120 on the back and the back are rotated about the vertically extending side of one of the hinges rotatably mounted. When the back (back) face is turned forward, the entire position of the back decoration back first decoration 3110 and back back second decoration 3120 is the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the position of the other side across. More specifically, the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the back second back 3111 (sub liquid crystal display 3114) of the first decoration 3110 is directed forward. (See FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)), when the back first back body decoration 3110 and the back second back body decoration 3120 are rotated together, the back first back body decoration The whole of the back of the second decorative body 3120 is moved to the left in the front view while the back of the second decorative body 3120 is in the state where the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (Fig. 104 (b) and See (c)). On the other hand, with the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 closed and the back back first decoration 3121 of the second decoration 3120 facing forward (FIG. 104 (b)) And (c)), when the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are rotated together, the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are rotated. While the whole moves to the right in the front view, the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is turned to the front from behind (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)). As a result, the area of the decoration by the back bottom first decoration 3110 or the back bottom second decoration 3120 in the front view gaming area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first decoration 3110 or the back second decoration 3120, and the back first decoration 3110 or the back second decoration The movement and decoration of 3120 can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in a state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are overlapped with each other, the back bottom back first decoration 3110 or the back bottom second decoration 3120 is selected. In the case of rotating and opening, or rotating the back and forth back first decoration 3110 and back and back second decoration 3120 together, in any case, back and back first decoration 3110 and back and back first Since the surface visible from the player side of the two decoration 3120 starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation start, whether the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are opened, or It is difficult to determine whether the player and the player rotate together, and the player can be thrilled and excited depending on which action is taken, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. In addition, with respect to the decoration that can be viewed in the original state, the player is different between the case where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 3120 are opened and rotated together. Since the change in the decoration that can be viewed from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and the player can be made less likely to get bored with various effects.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 is hinged to rotate the back-to-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 so that different decorations are provided. The decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 can be directed to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 in the left and right direction. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

  Further, in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, in the back bottom back second decoration 3120, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending up and down the outline of the quadrangle. The upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decoration support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be respectively rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130 It is supported and rotatably supported in two places, which are separated from each other as much as possible. Accordingly, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from the position eccentric to the center of gravity of the back side first decorative body 3110 and the back side second decorative body 3120 so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is positioned above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if a load is applied to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the back side first rear body 3110 attached and the back side second cosmetic body 3120, it is difficult to tilt the decorative body support side 3125 The back support first support 3110 and the back support second decoration 3120 can be rotated by supporting the decoration support shaft 3125 straight. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decorative body Since the support shaft 3125 is hard to tilt, the large-weight back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 which are hinge-rotatably attached to each other are also located coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[5-9 d. Back top left movable production unit]
Next, the back-upper-left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Fig. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109 (b) is a back upper left first decorative body and a back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state where it was moved to the position of a front view right end, and (c) shows the back first left decoration and the second back left decoration from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 from the left end to the vicinity of the center in a front view. The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 extends in the front view up and down of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 having a square shape in front view and a predetermined decoration on the front surface. The back top left second decoration 3220 and the back top left first decoration 3210 are mounted on the right side with the hinge rotatably attached and the two faces facing away being provided with different decorations The sliding drive unit 3230 for rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by a hinge, the rotary driving unit 3230 and the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the back upper left second decoration body 3220 in the lateral direction And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

The back top left first decorative body 3210 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 is a flat fixed decorative member 3211 having predetermined transparency on the front surface and having translucency, and the front end of the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view To cover the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212 which is mounted three coaxially vertically separated with respect to the vertically extending axial line projecting outward from the side A first decorative body base 3213 attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and projecting upward beyond the fixed decorative member 3211, and mounted between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211 The first decorative base 321 is connected to the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and to the upper surface of the first decorative base 3213 so that the side view is L-shaped. A connection portion 3215 extending from the left end to a position further to the right than the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connection portion 3215 and extending left and right, and from the front end near the left end of the connection portion 3215 And a flat plate-like detection piece 3217 extending.
Is equipped.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a rectangular shape with a slightly elongated shape in a front view. The fixed decoration member 3211 has a side extending to the left and right, and a side extending to the left and the right of the first decoration 3110 at the back and the second decoration 3120 at the back and the back of the movable effect unit 3100. The same length, and the length of the side extending up and down is shorter than the length of the side extending up and down of the back and forth first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120. The fixed decoration member 3211 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the characters of "sparrow" is given. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the present embodiment, the lower part of the lowermost "one" part is disconnected from the lowermost part of the character "sparrow".

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are respectively provided at the upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions above the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side in a front view of the fixed decorative member 3211. The rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front face of a portion protruding upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the rear surface of the vertically extending portion of the L-shaped side view in the connection portion 3215. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can emit light and decorate the fixed decorative member 3211 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back upper left first decoration substrate 3214.

  The back top left second decorative body 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 is a light transmitting first decoration member 3221 having a rectangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and the back surface of the first decoration member 3221 And a second decorative member 3222 having translucency having a decoration different from the first decorative member 3221 on the surface facing the surface of the first decorative member 3221 and the left and right of the first decorative member 3221 And two second hinge portions 3223 protruding outward from one of the vertically extending sides of one of the two, and hinged rotatably attached to the first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-like operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 has a decoration on the surface of which the characters "Dokun" are given. The second decorative member 3222 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character of "sparrow" is formed on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221. This second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character of "Song" by being located on the left side in a front view of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decoration member 3211 and the second decoration member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part is interrupted from the upper side of the lowermost "one" part with respect to the character of the "sparrow" On this lower side, the decoration (cut out decoration) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 is positioned By doing this, the letters "Song" are completed. In addition, since the cut-out decoration 3260 on the side of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", it can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut off.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 project rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated, and are respectively provided at positions closer to the center than the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can emit light and decorate the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate (not shown). .

  The rotary drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a space between the rotary drive base 3231 attached to the front of the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rotary drive base 3231 A rotary drive cover 3232 which is formed and mounted on the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231, and rotatably mounted between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231 and with an operation gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 A spur gear-like transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission gear 3233, and a back upper first drive motor mounted on the top surface of the rotation drive cover 322 to rotationally drive the drive gear 3235, mounted between the rotary drive base 3231 and the rotary drive cover 3232, the rotational position of the drive gear Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extended outward, and the rotation detection sensor detects this detection piece to detect the rotational position of the drive gear, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, The rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected through the operating gear 3225.

  The rotary drive unit 3230 causes the back upper left second decoration 3220 to be hinge-rotated via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233 and the operation gear 3225 by rotationally driving the back upper left first drive motor 3235. Can.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is slidably mounted on the horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, the horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front of the unit base 3241 and the slide rail 3242 A slider 3243 to which the connection portion 3215 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is attached on the front, and a base cover 3244 attached to the front of the unit base 3241 such that a space is formed between the unit base 3241 A back upper left second drive motor 3245 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241 through the base cover 3244; Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 The unit base 3241 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246, a small diameter first transmission gear 3247a meshing with the drive gear 3246, and a large diameter second transmission gear 3247b integrally rotating with the first transmission gear 3247a. The transmission gear member 3247 rotatably mounted between the cover 3244 and the second transmission gear 3247 b of the transmission gear member 3247 are meshed with the rack gear 3216 of the first rear body 3210 and meshed with the second transmission gear 3247 b. A pinion gear 3248 rotatably mounted between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 mounted on the base cover 3244 and detecting the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 Have.

  In addition, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the front of the base cover 3244 on the left in front view, and has a back upper left first decoration substrate 3214, a back upper left second decoration substrate, a back upper left first drive motor 3235, a rotation detection sensor, The back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043 and the front cover of the back upper left relay board 3250 A substrate cover 3251 attached to the front, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front of the substrate cover 3251, and a back left upper decorative substrate 3253 attached to the front of the back upper left decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front , The front left of the back upper left decorative base 3252 is attached to cover the front of the back left upper decorative substrate 3253 A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the slide gear 3246 rotates the drive gear 3246 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 backs up the back upper left first decorative body 3210 via the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248 and the rack gear 3216. The left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 can be slid in the lateral direction. In addition, by making the LED of the back left upper decorative substrate 3253 emit light as appropriate, the back left upper decoration 3254 can be made to emit light.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is such that the back upper left second decoration 3220 covers the front of the back upper left first decoration 3210. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the rotary drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state of being In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the left end in the front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) also detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. In addition, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decoration unit 3050 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the player side From the point of view is invisible (see FIG. 81 etc.).

  Under normal conditions, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction of the front view through the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right in front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 engaged with the 3248 and reaches the right end The slide movement is stopped (see FIG. 109 (b)). In this state, the hinge-rotatable vertically extending axes of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the state assembled to the game board 5 are the center of the game area 5 a in the left-right direction. And the back top left first decorative body 3210 is visible from the player side through the center character 2500 (see FIG. 133).

  Then, with the back upper left first decorative body 3210 positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotational drive unit 3230 is via the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the actuating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the back upper left second decoration 3220 folded and covering the front of the back upper left first decoration 3210 is expanded The hinge is turned to be in a state of being lined up on the right side in front view of the back top left first decorative body 3210 (see FIG. 109 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side, so that the size is about twice as large as that in the normal state. While being able to attract the player's attention strongly, the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of facing the front side by side and the respective decorations are integrated. And the decoration of the letters "Sparrow" will be visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are decorated with the decoration applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. A corresponding decoration is provided to make the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 inconspicuous when the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is opened from the back upper left first decorative body 3210 It is possible to make the player visually recognize the character of "sparrow" in a good state.

  In addition, the decoration of the character of "Sparrow" that can be viewed together as one piece is broken down from the position above the lowermost "one" part, and the back top left first decoration 3210 and the back top Integrally with the decoration of the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 of the back and back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decoration 3220 In this case, the letters "sparrow" are complete (see FIG. 134).

  In this manner, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down The hinge can be folded so as to cover the front of the first back decoration 3210 or can be expanded to be aligned with the right front of the first back decoration 3210 by rotating the hinge about a vertical axis. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

5-9 e. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 110 and FIG. FIG. 110 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative member in the back left movable effect unit being protruded.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 in a front view. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported slidably in the left and right direction behind the back right fixed decoration 3310 and the back right fixed decoration 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front and a predetermined The frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the decoration is applied and the back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left and right direction to be attached in the back box 3010 and the back left fixed decoration 3310 is attached to the front And a back left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a vertically long shape in a front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 has a three-dimensional decoration and is attached to the light transmitting fixed side decorative member 3311 and the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a left rear fixed decoration substrate 3312. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially provided with a decoration of "發". The back left fixed decoration 3310 can emit light and decorate the fixed side decoration member 3311 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left fixed decoration substrate 3312.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310 as viewed from the front. The back left movable decorative body 3320 is a frame-like movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a translucent frame-like decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321 And a frame-like movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322 and a back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And a substrate 3324.

  The movable-side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back-bottom back first decoration 3110 in the back-bottom back movable presentation unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes below the movable side decoration member 3321 and the decoration frame 3322, and the protruding portion is slidably mounted in the left-right direction by the back left drive unit 3330. Although the illustration is omitted, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U-shape along a portion on the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction in a front view. The light emitting decoration of the movable side decoration member 3321 can be performed by making the LED of the back left movable decoration substrate 3324 emit light.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide laterally. The slide guide 3332 attached to the left and right direction, the back left drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation axis extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation axis of the back left drive motor 3333 A hook-like actuating arm (not shown) attached at the tip end side and connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320 and a slide detection sensor 3335 attached to the unit base 3331 for detecting the rotational position of the actuating arm Is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 and fixed to the back left Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 mounts the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in front view. The slide guide 3332 slidably mounts the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 in the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 in a rear view. The actuating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end in the rear view of the lower side of the frame-like back left movable decorative body 3320 at the tip end. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the action | operation arm is penetrating the front-back at the front-end | tip, and the slit extended in the longitudinal direction is formed in it. A guide pin protruding rearward from near the lower right corner in the rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted in the slit.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the back left movable decoration 3320 is positioned behind the back left fixed decoration 3310, and can hardly be seen from the front It is in a state of That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the invisible position which is not visible. In this normal state, the actuating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. In the normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, a part of the front right end of the back left fixed decoration placed on the front side faces the frame of the center character 2500 and the back left The front left portion of the front face of the fixed decoration can be viewed from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the first back body 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 of the back movable back effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the actuating arm is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted in the slit of the tip of the actuating arm The actuating arm is pressed to the right in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides and moves straight to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the portion on the right side of the frame-like back left fixed decoration 3320 substantially leaving the left side in the front view is positioned from the back of the back left fixed decoration 3310 in the front view to the right, sliding movement to the right is stopped. Thereby, the site | part on the right side rather than the left side in the frame-like back left movable decoration 3320 is located in the right of the back left fixed decoration 3310, and it becomes visible from a front (refer FIG.111 (b) ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is in the state of being located at the appearance position which can be visually recognized from the player side.

  When the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is positioned at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 passes through the frame of the center character 2500 from the player side in a state assembled to the game board 5 While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind can be viewed through the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Therefore, when a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) is displayed on the display area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is displayed for the player. An illusion can be made that the liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. As a result, it is possible to make the player illusion that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom back first movable body 3110 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9 f. Back-to-back moving production unit]
Next, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 112 to FIG. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit showing the movable effect unit inside of the back of the back unit from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the movable effect unit showing back inside of the unit from the back. FIG. 113 (a) is an exploded perspective view from the front of the back up middle movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 113 (b) is a disassembled back up middle inside movable presentation unit according to each main configuration It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 114 (a) is a front perspective view of the back top inside decoration unit of the back top inside movable movable effect unit, and FIG. 114 (b) is a back perspective view of the back top inside decoration unit. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back interior decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back interior decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 117 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up center decoration unit from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the back top inside decoration unit in the normal state, and FIG. 118 (b) is a state in which the pair of back top inside top decoration of the back top inside decoration unit is half-opened outward And (c) is a front view showing a pair of back top and bottom first decor bodies of the back top and center decor body unit in a completely open state.

  Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up inside drive unit of the back up inside movable movable unit seen from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) shows the back up inside drive unit of the back up inside movable moveable unit from the back FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 120 (b) is a back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 121 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back-up and middle movable presentation unit from the front. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in the normal state, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decoration unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. .

  The back-up, middle, and movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right end. As shown in FIG. 113, the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-to-back first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-to-back first decorative bodies 3411 which are attached to be openable and closable. The back-to-back decoration unit 3410 having the back-to-back second decoration 3412, the rotating connection member 3430 attached to the back surface of the back-to-back decoration unit 3410, and the rotating connection member 3430 Back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is vertically movable and rotatably mounted, and is mounted on the back front middle drive unit 3440 mounted in the back box 3010, and back upper right decoration mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440 A unit 3480 and a back-up middle relay board 3490 attached to the back surface of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, etc., the back top middle decoration unit 3410 of the back top middle movable effect unit 3400 is provided with a predetermined decoration on the front side and a pair of back top middle decoration bodies having translucency. 3411, a back-to-back second decoration 3412 disposed behind the pair of back-to-back first decorations 3411 and having a predetermined decoration on the front, and a pair of back-to-back first decorations A pair of light transmitting flat plate-like slide bases 3413 attached to the rear face of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 attached to the rear face and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face Back top middle decoration board 3414, Back top middle decoration board 3415 attached to the back surface of back decoration second decoration 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, back top middle decoration board Overturn the back of 3415 At the back side of the substrate cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the back surface of the second decorative body 3412 and the substrate cover 3416 in the back and top. A flat slider cover 3417 is attached, and a decoration unit base 3418 is attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417.

  In addition, the back and top decoration unit 3410 is attached to the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418 and to the rear surface of the motor base 3419, and the rotation shaft protrudes from the front surface of the motor base 3419 A spur gear-shaped first drive gear attached to the rotary shaft of the back drive first drive motor 3420 and the back drive first drive motor 3420 and disposed between the motor base 3419 and the decoration unit base 3418 3421 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 rotatably mounted on the decoration unit base 3418 such that the first drive gear 3421 is engaged with the first drive gear 3421 so that the front end projects forward of the decoration unit base Meshing with the first transmission gear 3422 and rotatably mounted on the front of the decoration unit base 3418 It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Furthermore, the back upper / middle decorative unit 3410 is engaged with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends laterally to a rack gear 3424 a and a mounting boss for attaching one of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417. A first slider 3424 having a 3424 b and slidably mounted in the lateral direction between the slider cover 3417 and the decoration unit base 3418, and a rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. The rack gear 3425a meshing with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extending left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b for attaching the remaining (other) of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417 , Slider cover 3417 and decorative body uni A second slider 3425 slidably mounted in the left-right direction with the base 3418; and a slide detection sensor 3426 attached from the rear side to the decoration unit base 3418 and detecting the slide position of the second slider 3425; And.

  When viewed from the front, the pair of back-to-back first decoration 3411 of the back-to-back middle decoration unit 3410 bulges in a semicircular arc outward at one end side in the lengthwise direction of the square extending in the left and right, The opposite end is recessed inward in a semicircular arc, and the portion recessed in the semicircular arc is a recess 3411 a. Further, the outer periphery of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 except for the end side in which the concave portion 3411 a recessed in a semicircular arc shape inward is extended in a plate shape to the rear. The pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are attached in a state where the end sides where the concave portions 3411 a are formed face each other. In addition, the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are entirely formed to be milky white having translucency, and one of the back and top of the first decorative bodies 3411 is the head side of the “dragon”. Decorations are respectively formed on the front of the remaining (other) back first decoration 3411 so as to have a metallic luster on the tail side of the "dragon".

  The shape of the second decorative body 3412 in the back surface is a flat shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view, and is formed slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back surface first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed) It is done. The second decorative body 3412 has a circular center bulging portion 3412a which can be inserted into the concave portion 3411a of the first decorative body 3411 at the center and the left and right of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular center lateral decoration 3412 b formed two on the both sides vertically separated from each other, and a circle having the same size as the center lateral decoration 3412 b and formed on the left and right outer sides of the center lateral decoration 3412 b An intermediate decorative portion 3412 c and a circular end decorative portion 3412 d which are respectively formed on the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412 c and near the left and right ends and have a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412 c. The second decorative body 3412 is formed of a translucent white as a whole, and the outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d on the front surface, etc. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The back decoration and the second decoration 3412 has a decoration that reminds the player of the "point bar" of "mah-jong".

  The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper surface, and the back of the outer peripheral portion extending rearward of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper surface It is attached to the end. In this way, by assembling the first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413 in the back upper side, the back upper side is formed between the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper side and the slide base 3413. A space is formed in which the second decoration 3412, the second back decoration substrate 3415, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted. In addition, the pair of slide bases 3413 are respectively provided with slits 3413a which penetrate through the front and rear and extend left and right. The slit 3413a of one of the slide bases 3413 of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed closer to the upper side, and the slit 3413a of the other slide bases 3413 is formed closer to the lower side. In addition, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a translucent milky white.

  The pair of back and top first decorative substrates 3414 and the back and top second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates whose surfaces (entire surface) are white. This makes it easy to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate inconspicuous. The back surface of the first decoration 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 at the back of the back surface of the back of the first decoration 3411 so that the light from the LED is on the back surface. Since the irradiation range of light is expanded until it reaches the part which forms the front face of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 can be uniformly decorated by emitting light. it can. On the other hand, the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back and top can light-emitting and decorate the whole of the second decorative body 3412 in the back and back, in addition to the central decorative portion 3412 a of the second decorative body 3412 in the back and the central horizontal decorative portion The light 3412 b, the intermediate decoration 3412 c, and the end decoration 3412 d can be lighted and decorated independently.

  The substrate cover 3416 has a mounting boss 3416 a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape rearward from near both left and right ends of the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413. The mounting boss 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 has a rear end passing through the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413 attached to the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting bosses 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 relatively slide in the slit 3413 a in the left-right direction via the bushes 3427 that are rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates in the front and back direction and extends in the left and right direction, and the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted through the first slit 3417a and penetrates in the front and back direction and extends in the left and right The mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3417b. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. The second slit 3417 b is formed in the vicinity of the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is disposed slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction in front view (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is disposed such that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from the lower side, and two mounting bosses 3424b aligned in the left and right directions from the left end in the front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have their front ends projecting forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and the first decoration on the back on which the head side of the "dragon" is decorated It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is disposed such that the rack gear 3425a meshes from above with respect to the first pinion gear 3423, and two mounting bosses 3425b aligned in the left and right directions from the right end in the front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 project forward from the front end through the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417, and are decorated with the tail side of the "dragon" on the back of the first decorative body It is attached to the back of the slide base 3413 attached to the 3411. In addition, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c which protrudes upward in a plate shape from an upper portion near the right end in a front view. The detection piece 3425 c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 118 (a) etc., the back side of the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 is closed by bringing the end sides of the pair of back top middle first decoration bodies 3411 on the concave portion 3411a side into contact with each other. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the second decorative body 3412 on the back is bulging forward through the circular opening formed by the recess 3411a, and the other portion of the second decorative body 3412 on the back is from the front. I can not see it.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the front end left end of the first slider 3424 and the front end right end of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. The detection piece 3425 c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decoration 3412 a is lighted and decorated by the second decoration substrate 3415 in the back-up, the player can be made to show the decoration recalling the “thousand sticks” of “mah-jong”. In the normal state, when the whole second decoration 3412 is lit and decorated with the second back decoration substrate 3415, the first decoration on the back covering the front of the second decoration 3412 is set. The entire body 3411 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, when the LED of the first decorative body 3414 is lit in the normal state, the light is formed in white, and the back of the second decorative body 3415 in the back upper side and the back upper side of the first decorative body 3414 is formed in white. The light can be reflected and diffused on the front surface and the like, and the outer periphery and the like of the first decorative body 3411 can be emitted and decorated in the back and top.

  From the normal state, when the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction in a front view through the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 by the first drive motor 3420 in the back-up, the first The first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view by the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 meshing with the pinion gear 3423, and the second slider 3425 to the right in front view Slide to move. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 in the back on which the decoration on the head side of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 is slid to the left in front view, and The first decorative body 3411 in the back on which the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the mounting boss 3425 b of the second slider 3425 is slid to the right in a front view, and the pair of back uppers The first decoration 3411 slides open in a direction away from each other.

  By sliding the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction away from each other, the back and top middle decorative members 3411 are formed from the edge sides on the concave portion 3411 a side of the first and back back coverings. A part of the second decoration 3412 located on the back of 3411 comes to face forward. Then, with the center horizontal decoration 3412 b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 Stop the rotational drive of In this state (intermediately open state), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and the four middle The central horizontal decorative portion 3412 b is in a state of facing forward. In this state, when making the central decorative portion 3412 a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412 b emit light by means of the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back and top, the player is made to show the decoration recalling the “five thousand point bar” of “mahjong”. it can.

  In this state, the back and top first drive motor 3420 slides the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction away from each other and stops the rotational drive in the most separated state, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), substantially the whole of the second decorative body 3412 in the back upper side is in the front facing state between the pair of back upper and the first decorative bodies 3411 (full open state). In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back and middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward, and the back and inside middle second decorative substrate When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d are light-emitting decorated by 3415, the player can be made to show the decoration that evokes the "one-point bar" of "mahjong". it can. In addition, in this state, the back decoration first decoration substrate 3414 and the back decoration second decoration substrate 3415 make the entire back decoration first emission body 3411 and the back decoration second decoration 3412 emit light entirely. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back-up middle movable presentation unit 3400 is attached to the longitudinal center of the back side of the decoration unit base 3418 in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 and is mounted on the back of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. The intermediate base unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460.

  Subsequently, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 etc., the back-up / middle-drive unit 3440 can turn the back-up / back-up rotation unit 3460 and the back-up / back-up rotation unit 3460 on the front side. And a base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. A back-up second drive motor 3443 attached to the front of the 3442 and having a rotation shaft projecting rearward through the base cover 3442 and a flat attached to the rotation shaft of the back-up second drive motor 3443 A large diameter spur gear shaped large diameter transmission gear meshing with the second drive gear 3444 and the second drive gear 3444 A second transmission gear 3445 having a small diameter spur gear-like small diameter transmission gear 3445b integrally rotating with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a, and a second transmission gear 3445 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; A spur gear gear portion 3446a engaged with the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445 and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a are rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the raising and lowering drive are provided. The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the raising and lowering driving gear 3446 It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446 and Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  The back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and detects a rotation position of the back-up middle-turn unit 3460; a unit base 3441 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 Assist springs 3449 attached between them and biasing the back-up rotating unit 3460 in the direction in which the back-up inside decoration unit 3410 is lifted, and the entire body extends in the longitudinal direction while penetrating back and forth An assist arm 3450 which has an assist slit 3450a and whose proximal end is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and an assist arm 3450 is rotatably held from the front toward the unit base 3441 side. Arm holder 3451 attached to the front of the That.

  As shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is a bearing portion 3461 a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, a long hole penetrating back and forth and extending in a predetermined direction Drive slit 3461b in which the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c in which the connection bush 3432 of the rotational connection member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 projecting rearward A shallow box-like rotary unit base 3461 having a cylindrical assist pin 3461 d inserted into the 3450 a and opened at the rear, and a rotary unit base 3461 so as to close the open rear side of the rotary unit base 3461 A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461 It is equipped with a.

  Also, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 has a back-up middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front of the rotation unit base 3461 such that the rotation shaft protrudes between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461; The spur gear third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotation shaft of the third drive motor 3463 in the back and top, and the third drive gear 3464 mesh with the third drive gear 3464 so as to be rotatable by the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 A wedge-shaped transmission rack gear meshed with the drive pinion gear 3465 mounted thereon and the drive pinion gear 3465 and slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 3466 and the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the rotation unit base 3461 inserted A spur gear-like driven pinion gear 3467 which is rotatably mounted by a rotation unit base 3461 and a rear cover 3462 coaxially with 3461c and to which the rear end of the connection base 3431 of the rotary connection member 3430 is attached on the front surface; Is equipped.

  Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotational position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and inserts the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 inside. The bush 3469 is detached from the assist pin 3461 d attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461 d of the brazed cylindrical bush 3469 which is slidably inserted in the assist slit 3450 a of the assist arm 3450 and the outside of the assist unit 3450 And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing the

  The unit base 3441 of the back-up, middle-drive unit 3440 is formed in such a shape that the upper part of the left side in a front view of the rectangular shape extending up and down protrudes leftward and protrudes forward from the front of the lower part A pivot support pin 3441a is provided for pivotally mounting the unit 3460. The rotation support pin 3441 a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461 a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. While the rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 near the right end in the front view at the upper end of the front surface, the assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end in the front view.

  The back upper second drive motor 3643 is attached near the upper end of the front surface of the base cover 3442. The vertical drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is a substantially central position between the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442 in the vertical direction. Mounted rotatably (see Figure 122).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same plane without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 side by the arm presser 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 extends left and right, and a bearing portion 3461 a into which the rotation support pin 3441 a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed at the lower right corner in a front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461 a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in a front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends along the lower side to the left and right longer than the transmission rack gear 3466, and has a slide groove 3461e slidably accommodating the transmission rack gear 3466, and protrudes upward from the upper right end in front view to detect rotation And a detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

  The back and middle third drive motor 3643 is mounted substantially at the center between the bearing 3461 a and the insertion hole 3461 c in the rotary unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, outer peripheral gear teeth meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only in a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and do not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 is provided with a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion on the outer periphery where the gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Subsequently, the back upper right decoration unit 3480 of the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front of the decoration base 3481 and a decoration base 3481 attached to the front of the base cover 3442 at a position in front of the back up middle second drive motor 3443 in the back up middle drive unit 3440 A back upper right decorative substrate 3482 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a light transmitting back upper right decorative body 3483 disposed on the front of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482 and attached to the front of the decorative base 3481 And.

  The back upper right decoration unit 3480 can emit light and decorate the back upper right decoration body 3483 by causing the LED of the back upper right decoration substrate 3482 to emit light. The back upper right decoration body 3483 of the back right upper decoration unit 3480 is assembled on the game board 5, and the gate part 2003 and the general winning in the right hitting distribution space 2541 in the front view right hitting game area 2540 of the center character 2500 It is located between the mouth 2001 and can illuminate and decorate the inside of the upper right distribution space 2541 from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back top middle relay board 3490 of the back top middle movable effect unit 3400 is a back top middle first decoration board 3414, a back top middle second decoration board 3415, a back middle first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, a back top Middle second drive motor 3443, rotation detection sensor 3448, back upper middle third drive motor 3463, rotation detection sensor 3468, back upper right decoration substrate 3482, effect drive substrate 3043 connected to peripheral control substrate 1510, Connected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described along with the operation of the back up middle drive unit 3440. In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the upper side of the movable effect unit 3400 has its upper side extended in the state in which the decorative unit 3410 is extended horizontally so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal. It is located slightly lower than the upper side of the unit base 3441 in the back-up and middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, the pair of back top first ornaments 3411 abut on each other and close.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446 b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is the drive slit 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461. Located at the lower end of the inside. In this state, a rotational moment acts on the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view centering on the rotation support pin 3441 a by the weight of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 or the like. ing. The drive pin 3446 b is pressed to the left side by the rotation slit via the drive slit 3461 b. Then, the lift drive gear 3446 tries to rotate by pressing the drive pin 3446 b, but the drive pin 3446 b passes through the rotation center of the lift drive gear 3446 and is a line perpendicular to the direction in which the drive slit 3461 b extends. Since the lower elevation gear 3446 is positioned lower than the lower elevation gear 3446, the elevation drive gear 3446 tries to rotate clockwise in a front view. However, since drive pin 3446b of lift drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in drive slit 3461b, lift drive gear 3446 can not rotate in the clockwise direction any more and back-up middle rotation unit 3460 Is maintained in the normal state, and the back decoration unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Further, in this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the second drive motor 3443 in the back-up via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. It is possible to maintain the back top middle decoration unit 3410 at the rising end even if the back top middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  Further, in the normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is located at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) is away, The driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is located in the vicinity of the rotational end in the clockwise direction in a front view. In the normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (following pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Furthermore, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally and the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 which is slidably inserted in the assist slit 3450 a of the assist arm 3450 is the base in the assist slit 3450 a. It is located near the end of the end.

  In the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in the normal state, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center character 2500 is a pair of back upper and lower first decorative bodies 3411 that are horizontally extended and closed in the state assembled on the game board 5. It is located above the display screen of and visible from the player side (see FIG. 81 etc.).

  From this normal state, raising and lowering the vertical drive gear 3446 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 in the back up, raises and lowers Drive pin 3446b of drive gear 3446 revolves in a counterclockwise direction so as to ascend in drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b leftward, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is pivotally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It will rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view about the pin 3441a.

  When the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (the bearing portion 3461a) and on the left in the front view The 3461 c (following pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper center decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 that has passed through the insertion hole 3461 c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 revolves in a counterclockwise direction in a front view about the rotation support pin 3441 a, so the assist arm 3450 is in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the assist pin 3461 d. As it pivots, the assist pin 3461 d slides in the assist slit 3450 a toward its tip end.

  Then, when the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the normal state, the rotational drive of the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 is stopped, and the insertion hole 3461 c of the rotation unit base 3461 (Driven pinion gear 3467) is positioned lower than the pivoting support pin 3441a, and the back-up and in-place decorative unit 3410 is positioned at the lowering end (see FIG. 123 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotation unit base 3461 abuts against the unit base 3441 and the assist pin 3461 d abuts against the end on the tip side in the assist slit 3450 a, and the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 The rotation is restricted.

  In the state where the back-up inside decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descent end by rotating the back-up inside rotation unit 3460 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the back up inside decoration is assembled in the state assembled to the game board 5 The center of the body unit 3410 (the center decoration 3412 a of the second decoration 3412 in the back and top) is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center part 2500 (see FIG. 137).

  With the back and top decoration unit 3410 moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the front view flower by the back and top third drive motor 3643 via the third drive gear 3464 The transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides in the slide groove 3461e in the right direction in a front view. The transmission rack gear 3466 slides in the right direction, whereby the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the rotational connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 The back top center decoration unit 3410 is also rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430.

  In the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end in the front view of the slide groove 3461e. In the present embodiment, the back top center decoration unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in the state in which the back-and-front middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, it can rotate 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 123 (FIG. see b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123 (b), the first drive motor 3420 is driven to slide the pair of back middle first decoration bodies 3411 in a direction away from each other in the back top middle decoration unit 3410. Move (see FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 etc.).

  In this manner, the back-up and up-side movable unit 3400 has a back-up and inside decoration unit 3410 having a pair of back-up and inside first backers 3411 and a back-and-back and inside second back body 3412 and a back and up and inside drive unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down as well as being able to rotate, it is possible to open and close the pair of back upper first decorative bodies 3411 and to present the player with a variety of movable effects. In addition, in the “mah-jongg” that is expressed by the decoration of the back upper second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies by the degree of opening of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 Since the score of the "point bar" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced by the point score.

[5-9 g. Back lower front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 124 to FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable front effect unit disassembled from the back and front decoration unit and seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is a disassembled back rear movable movement unit except the back front decoration unit And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit, and FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front movable function unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing the decoration unit elevating mechanism in the back lower front movable effect unit. FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decoration unit raising / lowering mechanism when the back bottom front decoration unit is raised, and FIG. 130 (b) is an enlarged view of the unit raising / lowering pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit raising and lowering pins and the raising and lowering slits by further enlarging (b). FIG. 131 (a) is a front view showing the back lower front movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 131 (b) is a front view showing the back lower front decoration unit raised from the state of FIG. (C) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back 1st decoration of the back decoration front decoration unit from the state of (b).

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is mounted on the front of the back lower movable front effect unit 3100 by raising and lowering the back lower front decorative unit 3501 having a predetermined decoration and the back lower front decorative unit 3501. 3502, back lower left decoration unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end of the elevation unit 3502 in front view, and back decoration unit 3504 attached to the left of the front of the elevation unit 350 from the front left right direction center; A back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 mounted on the front of the lifting unit 3502 from the front to the left of the back decoration unit 3504 and a back lower front relay substrate 3506 attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit 3502; Is equipped.

  As shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. 128 etc., the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 is a plate shape extending in the left and right direction and different decorations are provided on both sides. The body 3510 and the back lower front first decoration 3510 are hingedly mounted on the upper side extending in the left and right direction, and are vertically movably attached to the lifting unit 3502 and decorated on the front side And a second decorative body 3520.

  The lower back front first decorative body 3510 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view, a predetermined box being formed on the front, and a shallow box shape having an open rear side. A shallow box-like light-transmitting member is attached to the back surface of the first front decorative member 3511 having light properties and the first front decorative member 3511 and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface, and the front side is opened. A first back decoration base 3513 attached between the first back decoration member 3512, the first back decoration member 3512 and the first front decoration member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 that project obliquely upward and backward so as to be coaxial with the axes extending from the left and right ends in a front view at the upper side of the first back decorative member 3512, and the first back decoration Positive of member 3512 A decorative body elevating pin 3515 which protrudes cylindrically from the right side of the right side and is slidably inserted in a slit 3533 a of a decorative body elevating arm 3533 in the back lower front second decorative body 3520 described later; And a flat detection piece 3516 protruding rearward from the right side in a front view of the back decoration member 3512.

  Of the two first hinge portions 3514 in the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in a front view is attached slightly to the left of the front end right end of the first back decoration member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the first lower back decoration 3511 has a decoration in which a plurality of "eyebrows" of "mah-jongg" are arranged in the left and right.

  The back bottom second decoration 3520 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is formed to be larger in left, right, upper and lower than the back bottom front first decoration 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front, and the rear side is A second decorative member 3521 having an open shallow box shape and light transmitting property, and a second lower front decorative substrate 3522 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface , A flat substrate cover 3523 which is attached to the back side of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the rear of the second lower back decorative substrate 3522 and a front view at the upper side of the second decorative member 3521 extending to the left and right It projects obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending leftward and rightward from near the left and right end parts, and for hinge-rotatably attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the first back decoration 3510. The right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side in the front view of the two cylindrical second hinge portions 3524 and the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is the back first lower decorative body 3510 And a cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 inserted from the right into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the front view, and a front view of the first decoration 3510 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the second decoration member 3521 in the front view And a hinge press 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the left first hinge portion 3514.

  In addition, the rear lower front second decorative body 3520 is a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view and opened rightward, and the gear base 3527 and the rotation shaft A back gear first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 in a front view to project rightward, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back first drive motor 3528 A transmission first gear 3530 meshing with the first drive gear 3529 and the first drive gear 3529 and rotatably mounted to the gear base 3527 and a transmission first gear 3530 meshing with the gear base 3527 A transmission second gear 3531 which is mounted on the gear base 3511; and a first lifting gear 3532 which meshes with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527; In the front view left of the base 3527, it is integrally rotated with the first lifting gear 3532 and penetrates in the left-right direction and extends on an axis passing through the rotation center, and the decoration lifting pin 3515 of the first back decoration 3510 The decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 having a slit 3533a slidably inserted, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first elevation gear 3532 as viewed from the right And a flat gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527. The flat gear cover 3534 is attached to the gear base 3527.

  Furthermore, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view, and a decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 A sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535; and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the top of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decoration unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decoration lifting pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower back first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first A decoration raising and lowering mechanism that causes the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first raising and lowering gear 3532, and the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 to hinge-rotate the back and forth front first decoration 3510 with respect to the axis extending horizontally It constitutes 3501A.

  In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is formed on the lower side of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right. , Equipped. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, etc., the lifting slit 3540 is formed such that both ends extending in the left and right direction are at the same height, and the upper side extending in the left and right extends a portion closer to the right from the left end in front view And a locking projection 3540a protruding downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the side on the left side in a front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the half arc of the left end of the lifting slit 3540, and the side on the right side in the front view is a lifting slit It is formed in the shape of a straight line which diagonally extends toward the left end of the part which extended horizontally a little from the upper end of the semicircle of the right end of 3540 to the left. The lower side extending to the left and right of the lifting slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is between the unit base 3550 and the flat unit base 3550 attached to the front of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, and the back of the back lower front decoration unit 3501. A base cover 3551 is attached to the front of the unit base 3550 with a space that can accommodate a portion lower than the front first decorative body 3510, and a rotary shaft protrudes between the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 Back second front drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 and a spur gear second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the second back front drive motor 3552; It meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 Function transmission second gear 3554 and second transmission gear 3554 are engaged with the second transmission gear 3554a and the second transmission gear 3554a, and the second transmission gear 3555a is semicircular and concentric with the arc of the second transmission gear 3555a. And an axial hole 3555c penetrating at the center of the main body 3555b and rotatably mounted by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arm 3555d extending from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second lifting gear 3555a. And a column-like member attached from the front to the tip of the arm 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 from the front and slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501. Unit lifting pin 3556a, front end of unit lifting pin 3556a A flat connection piece 3556b extending toward the axial hole 3555c along the arm 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 and a rear end of the connection piece 3556b protruding rearward from the front end of the main body 3555b of the unit lifting arm 3555 And an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c attached to the front.

  The back lower front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view. The second drive gear 3553 is provided with a flat detection piece 3553 a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached to rotate around a position near the upper part from the center in the left-right direction of the front view in the unit base 3550 and around the upper part. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from the axial hole 3555c to the tip of the arm 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

  In addition, the elevation unit 3502 is attached to the front of the unit base 3550 and is attached to the unit elevation detection sensor 3557 capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and to the right end in front view on the front of the unit base 3550. The slide base 3558 extends vertically, the vertically extending bar-like middle slider 3559 slidably mounted vertically on the front side of the slide base 3558, and vertically slidably mounted on the front side of the middle slider 3559 The front surface of the cage includes a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501.

  In this lifting unit 3502, the back lower front second drive motor 3552, second drive gear 3553, second transmission gear 3554, unit lifting arm 3555, arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit lifting pin 3556a), slide base 3558, middle slider 3559 The decoration unit elevating mechanism 3502A which raises and lowers the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is configured by the mounting slider 3560.

  Furthermore, the lifting unit 3502 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3550 at its proximal end, and penetrates forward and backward and extends toward the distal end, while the guide boss 3538 of the back front decoration unit 3501 is inserted A guide arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a, and a guide bush which is slidably inserted from the rear into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561 and into which the guide boss 3538 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 at the rear of the guide bush 3562, and an arm presser rotatably supporting the proximal end rear face of the guide arm 3561 and attached to the rear face of the unit base 3550 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position on the upper left on the upper left side in a front view, and the tip end side extends to the right.

  The back lower left decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable presentation unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view, and a three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front imitating a “mahjong” “eyebrow” And a back lower left decorative substrate 3561 attached to the front of the unit base 3550 behind the back lower left decorative body 3560 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted. The back lower left decoration unit 3503 can emit light and decorate the back left lower decoration 3560 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back lower left decoration substrate 3561. When assembled on the game board 5, the back lower left decoration unit 3503 is positioned behind the side unit top 2300, and can emit light and decorate the vicinity of the side unit top 2300 in the game area 5a.

  A back-to-back inside decoration unit 3504 of the back-to-back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the base cover 3551 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view Back-to-back decoration 3570, and back-to-back decoration substrate 3571 attached to the front of base cover 3551 at the back of back-to-back decoration 3570 and with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front ing. The back bottom and inside decoration unit 3504 can emit light and decorate the back and bottom inside decoration 3570 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back bottom inside decoration substrate 3571. When assembled on the game board 5, the back lower middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the lower side unit 2200 in the front view gaming area 5 a and the center role 2500.

  The back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide the gaming balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 under the side unit 2200 downward and can discharge them. The back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 whose front surface is open, and a transparent flat plate which closes the open front surface of the passage member 3580 A cover 3581 and a side rear decoration board 3582 attached to the front of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front are provided. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the back lower left ball induction unit 3505 is located behind the lower side unit 2200 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the lower side unit 2200 is made to emit light by the LEDs of the side rear decoration substrate 3582 as appropriate. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The back bottom front relay substrate 3506 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 is a back bottom front first decoration substrate 3513, a back bottom front second decoration substrate 3522, a back bottom first drive motor 3528, a decoration body elevation detection sensor 3535, Back second front drive motor 3552, unit elevation detection sensor 3557, back lower left decoration substrate 3561, back bottom inside decoration substrate 3571, side back decoration substrate 3582, effect driving substrate 3043 connected with peripheral control substrate 1510 Relay connection.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 131 (a) etc., in the normal state, the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the falling end, and the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is A back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated so as to descend and located in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3510 faces the front.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm 3555 d of the unit lift arm 3555 of the lift unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555 c and is attached to the tip of the arm 3555 d A unit raising and lowering pin 3556 a of an arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted in the raising and lowering slit 3540 of the lower front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the raising and lowering slit 3540. Further, the guide arm 3561 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 extends substantially horizontally with its front end facing rightward in a front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3561 a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decoration body lifting arm 3553 in the back second front decoration 3520 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center And the decorative body raising / lowering pin 3515 of the back first front decorative body 3510 inserted in the slit 3533a of the decorative body raising / lowering arm 3553 is positioned at the end near the rotation center in the slit 3533a There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back first front decoration body 3510 is detected by the decoration body elevation detection sensor 3535 of the back bottom front second decoration body 3520.

  In this normal state, it is located below the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view and behind the lower side of the center character 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the back bottom front decoration unit The first front decoration member 3511 of the back bottom first decoration 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

  Under normal conditions, the unit elevating arm 3555 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view through the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554 by the second lower drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. The unit lifting pin 3556a at the tip of the arm 3555d revolves in the direction of rising around the shaft hole 3555c. As the unit raising and lowering pins 3556a revolve and rise, the unit raising and lowering pins 3556a press the inside of the raising and lowering slits 3540 upward, and the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is raised. Since the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the right end in a front view rises straight without being inclined.

  As the back lower front decoration unit 3501 ascends, a unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 leftward in a front view. Then, when the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a moves to the left in front view than the lowermost projecting portion of the locking projection 3540a in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the back lower second driving motor 3552 is stopped. And the rotation of the unit lift arm 3555 (revolution of the unit lift pin 3556a) also stops, and the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 (decor unit lifting mechanism 3502A) (first rising position State) (see FIG. 131 (b)).

  In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the unit elevating arm 3555 (shaft hole 3555c). Due to the weight of the front decoration unit 3501, a rotational moment acts on the tip of the arm 3555d to rotate the unit lift arm 3555 clockwise in a front view. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), on the left side surface of the lock protrusion 3540a in contact with the unit elevating pin 3556a at the upper side of the lifting slit 3540, a portion on the right side of the contacting portion is Since the lock projection 3540a is intruded into the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawing) of the turning range of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a, the part where the lock projection 3540a penetrates in order to move downward The lock projection 3540a (back and front front decoration unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the back and front front decoration unit 3501 so that As the rotational moment acting on the lift pins 3556a is canceled out, the unit lift arm 3555 does not rotate clockwise as viewed from the front, and the rising end It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In the state where the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, substantially the entire back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is the center character 2500 in a front view in the state assembled on the game board The player is positioned within the frame, and the player can visually recognize the decoration of the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3510 from the player side.

  Subsequently, with the back lower front decoration unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530 are set by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decoration 3520. When the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 is rotated clockwise in right side view through the transmission second gear 3531 and the first raising and lowering gear 3532, the slit 3533 a of the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 enters the slit 3533 a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the lower hinge of the back first front decoration 3510 are moved forward and upward so that the decoration raising / lowering pin 3515 of the back first front decoration 3510 being inserted is pushed forward and the lower side of the back bottom first decoration 3510 moves forward and upward. The back and front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated about the second hinge portion 3524.

  Then, when the decoration lifting arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise in right side view, the rotation of the back driving first drive motor 3528 stops, and the back turning first decoration 3510 is back turning second It will be in the state located above the decoration 3520 (a raise position or an open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the first lower back decoration 3510, which was originally facing forward, is turned backward, and instead, the second lower back decoration 3520 of the first lower decoration is facing backward. The second back decoration member 3512 facing the second decoration member 3521 is directed to the front above the second decoration member 3521 with the front surface positioned substantially flush with the second decoration member 3521. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form a single large decoration (the decoration of the character of “S end”) (FIG. 131 ( see c)).

  With the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 ascended and the back bottom front first decoration body 3510 being hinge-rotated to be open, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the center character 2500 of Almost the lower half of the inside of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the first back decoration 3510 and the second back decoration 3520 (see FIG. 141).

  In this manner, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the back lower front decoration unit 3501 in the state of being stopped at the position of the rising end even if the back lower front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the back and front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. Also, since the rear lower front decoration unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position because it is locked in the middle of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a revolving in the rising direction, the back lower front decoration unit 3501 There is no such unnatural movement as lowering, and the player can enjoy the movement of the back and front decoration unit 3501.

  Further, in the back bottom front decoration unit 3501, as the back bottom front first decoration body 3510 is lifted, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending to the left and right, and therefore, the slide is linear. Since the portion of the first lower back decoration 3510 seen from the player side changes every moment as compared with the case where it is made to make it possible to make it stand out, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly The first back decoration member 3512 of the first back decoration 3510 and the second back decoration 3520 which can not be seen in the normal state by opening the hinge by turning the first back decoration 3510. The second decorative member 3521 can be shown to surprise the player.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 132 to FIG. FIG. 132 shows the back unit in the back and back movable movable unit in which the first decoration and the second decoration are rotated together in a normal position with the second decoration facing front It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 133 shows the back of the back unit and the back of the movable effect unit, the first decoration and the back of the second decoration are closed, and the back of the first decoration is directed to the front. In the state, slide to the approximate center of the game area in the horizontal direction, and slide the back top left first decoration body and the back top left second decoration body of the back up left movable effect unit to the approximate center position in the game area It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 134 shows that the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133 to the back, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the second decoration of the back is selected. With the decorative surface facing forward, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit is hinged to be opened, and the fixed decorative member of the back upper left first decorative body and the second of the back upper left second decorative body It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which faced the two decoration members in the front. FIG. 135 shows that the first decoration is hingedly opened by turning the back of the movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133 to the back, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the second decoration of the back is selected. It is a front view of a game board which shows the state where the decoration side was turned to the front.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit in a state in which the back left movable decoration is slid to the appearance position of the right end in a front view. FIG. 137 shows the front view counterclockwise as moving the back top inside decoration unit of the back up middle movable presentation unit in the back unit to the falling end position and extending the back top inside decoration unit down diagonally in front view left It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decoration bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slide-moved to the half open half open position. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to the fully open position. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board showing the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the back unit positioned at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the first back decoration is hingedly rotated from the state of FIG. 140 and raised above the second back decoration.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 etc., the game board 5 of the present embodiment passes through the frame of the center character 2500 and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000. , It can be visually recognized well from the player side (forward). In this normal state, the back of the back unit 3000, the hinge-rotatable back and back first decoration 3110 of the movable effect unit 3100 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are closed and the back and back first decoration are formed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 is directed forward so as to be visible from the player side, and the display of the sub liquid crystal display 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is on the right of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  Further, in the normal state, the back top left first decoration 3210 and the back top left second decoration 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are hinged to the back top left first decoration 3210. In a folded state in which the back upper left second decoration body 3220 is positioned in front of the fixed decoration member 3211 and is positioned behind the back left middle decoration unit 3050 which is the front left end with respect to the left and right slide directions The front side is blocked by the back left middle decoration unit 3050 so as not to be visible from the player side.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back left movable decoration 3321 of the back left movable presentation unit 3300 of the back unit is positioned behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 which is the front left end with respect to the left and right slide directions. A part of the back left fixed decoration 3310 faces slightly forward through the center character 2500 frame. Also, in the normal state, the back top middle decoration unit 3410 of the back top middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising edge above the top side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front view center character 2500 is visible forward in the frame.

  Further, in the normal state, in the back lower front decoration unit 3501 of the back lower front movable presentation unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decoration body 3510 is hinged to rotate the back lower front second decoration body 3520 The lower end of the main liquid crystal display 1600 lower than the lower side of the main liquid crystal display 1600 so that the back lower front decoration unit 3501 does not face forward from the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 in the state of being folded down to the side. It is located in

  The game board 5 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect or light emission effect) .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back and back back second decorative body 3120 is viewed in plan by the back and back second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. The second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front by rotating in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 132). At this time, the back and back back first decoration 3110 which is closed and positioned to the front of the back and back second decoration 3120 is pushed by the back and back back second decoration 3120 and rotates together. Thereby, the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 While blocking the part of the effect image being displayed and making the back and back second decoration 3120 stand out, the back surface and back be decorated with the second decoration surface 3122 of the second decoration 3120 It is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of “,” and to make the player think that there may be something good to increase the expectation for the game.

  In addition, as effects (movable effects) using the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 and back and left movable presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back and back and back movable presentation unit 3100, the back and back third of the slide unit 3150 The rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to a position at the left end of the front view with the drive motor 3155 while the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are closed, and the rotation drive unit 3130 The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is turned to the front by rotating the first decorative body 3110 slightly back in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the first driving motor 3134. At the same time, in the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back top left first decorative body 3210 is made by the back top left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240, and the back top left second decoration body 3220 is back top left first With the first decorative member 3221 closed to the front with the decoration 3210 closed, it is slid along with the back upper left second decoration 3220 to the position of the front end right end (see FIG. 133).

  In the state shown in FIG. 133, vertically extending axes for hinge-rotating the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower back movable presentation unit 3100, and back upper left A vertically extending axis for hinge-rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is coaxially located to the left and right of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the direction center. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 with the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back top left second decoration 3220 diagonally arranged in the frame of the center role 2500 in front view Located in front of the As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the back bottom first decoration 3110 to the center side and the appearance of the back top left second decoration 3220.

  Then, in a state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back top left second decoration 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 133), the rotation drive unit 3130 in the back bottom movable effect unit 3100 The back rear first decoration 3110 folded by the first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back back second decoration 3120, The back bottom back first decoration body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the back second decoration body 3120 and their second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back top left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the back top left movable effect unit 3200 The back top left second decoration 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view to open forward from the back top left first decoration 3210, and the back top A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 134).

  In the state shown in FIG. 134, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are arranged side by side on the left and right of the back movable back production unit 3100 and the left and right back movable movable unit 3200 are arranged in the back The back first left decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are brought into a state where they are united vertically in the center of the frame of the center character 2500 in front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The front of the display screen is almost covered. In addition, the second decorative surface 3111, 3121 of the back-to-back first decoration 3110 and back-to-back second decoration 3120 of the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3100 facing the front, and the back-to-top left movable presentation unit 3200 The characters “Song of Stave” written vertically by the decoration given to the fixed decoration member 3211 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center character 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), giving a great impact to the player, and a chance of "big hit game" and the like. Can strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  By the way, in the above, the effect of simultaneously opening the back bottom back first decoration 3110 of the back bottom back movable unit 3100 and the back top left second decoration 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 has been described. As shown at 135, only the first decorative body 3110 may be opened first, after the back of the movable effect unit 3100. Thereby, the back decoration back 1st decoration 3110 of back movement back movable motive unit 3100 and the back decoration 2nd decoration 3120 are first opened by hinge rotation, and those 2nd decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 are turned to the front. And, the word "holy" will be visible first. At this time, since the cut decoration 3170 such as “one” is provided on the upper side of the character “St.”, the decoration to be a set to complete the cut decoration 3170 on the upper side to the player It can be recognized that there is a (cut out decoration 3260), and the player is asked whether the set of the decoration appears or not (whether the back left second decoration 3220 is hinged open or not). It is possible to make the player feel nervous and pounding, and to increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slide-moved to the appearance position rightward in the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located immediately behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in the frame of the center character 2500. And is visible from the player (see FIG. 136). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the rear, An illusion can be made as the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, since the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same size and the same decoration as the first back decoration 3110 in the back lower back movable presentation unit 3100, the back left movable decoration 3320 is When the decorative body 3320 is made to appear, another liquid crystal display device appears on the left side so as to form a pair with the back side and the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) on the right side. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the back and back first decorative body 3110 can be greatly enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back-up middle movable presentation unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the direction of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 by the second drive motor 3443 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is viewed in a counterclockwise direction. And the back upper center decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip is located at the lowering end, and the back top middle decoration unit by the third drive motor 3463 of the back top middle rotation unit 3460. Rotate 3410 to the pivot point in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back and top decoration unit 3410 is positioned approximately at the center of the frame of the center character 2500 in front view, and the back and top decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end raised. State (Fig. 137). As a result, since the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 falls to the central position while rotating, the player is turned to the back middle decoration by the movement. The unit 3410 can be noticed, and the movement of the back-to-back decoration unit 3410 in a form that recalls the "thousand-stick" of "mah-jongg" is expected to have an expectation for a game as if it might be something good It can make you feel better.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137, from the state where the back-up interior decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lowering end and obliquely extended, the back-up interior decoration unit 3410 is closed by the first drive motor 3420 inside the back top. A pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper and lower second decorative body 3412 are between the pair of back and upper first decorative bodies 3411, Since the player is facing forward, the player can be reminded of the "five thousand point bar" of "mah-jong", and it is expected that the possibility of "big hit game" will increase. It can make you feel better.

  Also, when the back of the first back-up first drive motor 3420 slides the pair of back-to-back first decorative bodies 3411 in the direction to separate further from the state of FIG. 138 into the fully open state, as shown in FIG. The central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back-to-back second decorative member 3412 face forward from between the first-to-back decorative members 3411 In order to be in a state, the player can be reminded of a "one-man stick" of "mah-jongg" and convinced that the drawn first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" This makes it possible to enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, as an effect using the back and bottom front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back and bottom front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated to the front of the back and bottom front second decorative body 3520 and remains folded. Then, the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is raised from the position of the lowering end to the position of the rising end by the back bottom front second drive motor 3552 of the lifting and lowering unit 3502. When the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, substantially the entire back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 in a front view, The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the back first front decorative member 3510 can be visually recognized well from the user side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the first decorative body 3510 moves up from the bottom to cover the lower front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that it is possible for the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, and a sense of expectation for gaming. It can be enhanced. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3511 has a decoration in which a plurality of “marshes” of “mah-jongg” are arranged. As the front decorative member 3511 is lifted and can be visually recognized, it is possible for the player to have an illusion and enjoyment as if the user's side is lined up.

  Then, in a state where the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting and lowering unit 3502, the back bottom front first drive motor 3528 of the back bottom front second decoration 352 (decoring body lifting mechanism 3501A) When the back decoration front first decoration 3510 is hinged with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so as to rise, and it is positioned above the back decoration front second decoration 3520 The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the first back decorative first body 3510 are vertically aligned. In this state, substantially the lower half of the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the first decoration 3510 and the second decoration 3520 in front view. The decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form a single large decoration (the decoration of the character of “S end”) (FIG. 141). See). Thus, the first front decorative member 3511 having the decoration in which a plurality of "mahjong tiles" are arranged side by side is hinge-rotated about an axis extending in the left and right direction to mean "up", and the word "wasted" Can appear to the player that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", and it is entertaining by the feeling of expectation for the occurrence of the "big hit game" Can be increased.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5 and a payout control board 951 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper dish liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image in the device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting gaming balls received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003, and detecting gaming balls received in the first large winning opening 2005 Second large winning opening sensor 2254 for detecting game balls received by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening 2006a as the second large winning opening 2006, and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, and Detection signals from the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, and a magnetic detection sensor for detecting improper magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. It is input via the port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2550, the first attack solenoid 2113, the second upper attack solenoid 2553, and outputs a drive signal to the second lower attachment solenoid 2556, or the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the second special symbol display, the first special symbol memory display The second special symbol memory indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal symbol memory indicator, the game state indicator, the round indicator, and the like output the drive signal.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening sensor 2104, the second start opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening A noncontact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game balls enter frequently, The detection of gaming balls by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 951 and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. To Furthermore, the main control MPU controls various commands relating to control of game effects executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 etc. and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 around the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. It is transmitted to the control unit 1511. Note that the main control MPU, as described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  As described in detail later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Provided). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 951 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls is not shown in detail, but performs payout control by the payout control unit 952 for performing various control related to payout and firing control by the firing solenoid 682 A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that clears an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the gaming balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removing operation.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 951 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, or the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port Ru.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the far cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out Based on the detection signal from detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no gaming ball in payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, in the payout paths 381d and 382d of the payout device 830, the payout wing 839 and the gaming ball are engaged to notify that the payout wing 839 is difficult to rotate) "" Is displayed Indicates that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When there is a "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, "full" (Specifically, the game ball stored in the far cover unit 520 is notified that it is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is displayed, it notifies that it is "CR not connected" (indication that the electric connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU Be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334, and this signal is a display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and sphere feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is not shown in detail but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding launch are input. A circuit, an oscillating circuit for outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the fire reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In the handle unit 500 relationship, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504 and a stop that detects whether the game ball is forcibly stopped to stop by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, and a firing reference pulse is input At the same time, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit is triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse and outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 so that the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 are When one ball is received in the feed unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the received game ball is sent to the striking device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control substrate 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control substrate 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 142, performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or a door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the vibration generator 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each frame of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of a light-on signal to a color LED or the like provided on a substrate, door-side light emission data for outputting a blink signal or a gradation light-on signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal display control unit In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via an effect drive board 3043 attached to the back surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 and the effect button press sensor 258 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 outputs a signal based on the operation signal. I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and various sounds adapted to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 Control is performed so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or the like) are transmitted to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the low frequency speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 as sound information. By sending (4.1 ch surround signal etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side on / off blink commands, game board side on / off blink commands, movable body drive on / off commands, and display commands that are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the back surface of the back box. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received game board side lighting blink command The lighting signal or the blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 or the like.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043, the drive signal based on the received drive command, the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Output to

6-4. Effect display control section]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is not shown in detail but Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for displaying and controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal An image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied And have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to the control data (display command) and the corresponding schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. It is done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 as the schedule data progresses. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish are extracted. The drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. Also, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-progress signal to that effect to the display control MPU Do. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data of one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored. It affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 as an integrated unit. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thus, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when sprites overlap with one another are set, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device The image is drawn on a liquid crystal display device 244 or 3114.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front And a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and use the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, they are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as a sub scan, and similarly draw data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned from left to right as main scanning as main scanning. It outputs to each minute pixel.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 87, FIG. 92, FIG. 142 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, so that it can be hit more strongly as it is rotated clockwise, continuously up to 100 game balls per minute, That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 , And flow down the area on the left side of the center part 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened in the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character passes through the warp passage 2521 It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the induction channel 2523.

  The game balls supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right It is discharged backward from any of. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the gaming area 5 a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The gaming balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first winning opening 2005, and the like.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it can be accepted by 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 (driven And the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the upper right circulation space 2541. The game balls abut against the obstacle nails and circulate while changing the flow-down direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening 2004 which is normally closed by a second start opening door member 2549 are provided at the lower portion.

  The gaming balls having flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enter the lower right circulation space 2543 through the downstream right flow passage 2542. The game ball entering the lower right distribution space 2543 is closed with the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower opening winning hole 2006b arranged side by side as the second large winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attachment passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from within the gaming area 5a from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left in front view. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attack passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state When the gaming ball is released from the second attack passage 2543a into the gaming area 5a, the gaming ball is accepted by the first big winning opening 2005 with high probability.

  The game balls circulating in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow downward while the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, it may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attachment passage 2543a, and the gaming ball having entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When the game ball entering the upper right distribution space 2541 is right-handed and passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 An ordinary random number is acquired from among the above, and the selected ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in front view only once and the second With the start opening 2004 open, the game ball can be received in the second start opening 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, it is randomly drawn as "normal hit", "first normal hit", "second normal hit", or "third normal hit" as a "normal hit". When the time-saving control is being performed, the second start-up door member 2549 is selected when the result of the ordinary lottery of the ordinary lottery is either “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit”. By turning in a counterclockwise direction from the front view to open the second start port 2004, the gaming ball can be received in the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the front view By turning in the counterclockwise direction to close the second start port 2004, the opening / closing control to make the second start port 2004 impossible to receive the game ball is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times) Repeatedly). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second start port 2004 is "0.3 seconds" as a period of five times in which the game ball can be accepted. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “the second normal hit” The second start-up port 2004 is set to be able to receive the game ball as five times, each of "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is made to be able to receive the game ball 5 times each The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second second hit" and "third normal" Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variable display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time) until the stop display (until the lottery result is normally suggested). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is pivoted to an open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of time reduction control mentioned later, control which shortens normal fluctuation time rather than normal (state which is not performing time reduction control) is performed. In addition, the opening time for turning the second start opening door member 2549 by turning the second start opening door member 2549 may be changed according to the game state, for example, the time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a long time as compared with the case where the time saving control is performed.

  In addition, a new game ball is a gate unit during a period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and until a normal symbol which is variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until a normal lottery result is suggested) After passing 2003, it is not possible to start the variation display of the normal symbol anew on the normal symbol display, so the start of the variation display of the normal symbol is until the previous variation display of the normal symbol is finished (normal lottery result I will hold it until the end of the suggestion. Specifically, based on the fact that the gate sensor 2547 detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. Hold the start of the variation display of the normal symbol until. Note that the maximum number of reserved ordinary random numbers that can be stored on the main control board 1310 is up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. . Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated with a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" by obtaining a first special random number from among one special random number and collating the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table , A "small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result selected, the first special lottery result The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in the lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). In addition, in the first special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002, "off", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" Yes, by comparing the acquired first special random numbers with the big hit determination table, it is determined which of them is the above, and further after the big hit game normally (low probability state: with a probability of about 395 in this example) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability change state): in this example it will win the big hit with a probability of about 1 in 44) to improve the probability of winning the big hit (winning probability) than winning the big hit) Whether or not to execute (a definite variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute a time reduction control (time saving state) to shorten the fluctuation time more than usual if at least the first special lottery result is out (time short hit or not) And time-saving control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. In addition, the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 300 in this example).

  In addition, when the game ball received by the second start opening 2004 is detected by the second start opening sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. An advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit", "small hit", etc.) that is advantageous to the player by acquiring the second special random number of and comparing the acquired second special random number with the predetermined big hit determination table The lottery of the second special lottery result is generated. Then, after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result selected, the second special lottery result The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in the lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol according to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, in the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the second start opening 2004, "off", "2R big hit", "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", There are "7R big hit", "8R big hit" and "16R big hit", and it is judged by comparing the acquired second special random numbers with the big hit judgment table which one of them is the normal after the big hit game. Low probability state: Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability change state)) for improving the probability (winning probability) of winning in a big hit than in this example with a probability of winning about 1 in 395 Then, whether or not to win the big hit with a probability of about 1/44 (whether or not a definite variation big hit or not), and at least the second special lottery results time reduction control to shorten the fluctuation time than normal when out (Short time ) Whether or not to execute (time or junior high hit or not) and the time to execute time reduction control (time reduction number of times: special symbol (number of times the first special bat symbol and second special symbol change)), and so It has become.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state The eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) are displayed in the lighting mode according to the special lottery result after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, and then the first big winning opening Either of 2005 and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 will be in the state where reception of game sphere is possible with specified opening and closing pattern. When the game ball is received at the first large winning hole 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 when the first large winning hole 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 is open, a payout device is provided by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. From 830 to a predetermined number (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first large winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second large winning opening 2006) game balls Is dispensed onto the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 allow the game ball to be received, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 can receive many game balls. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  If the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first large winning opening 2005, the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) The open / close pattern that is acceptable after opening is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the first big prize winning opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept gaming balls, or it is determined in advance to the first big winning opening 2005 If either the number (for example, seven) of game balls are accepted or the predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted to the second large winning opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. The opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "4R big hit", 4 rounds if "5R big hit", 5 rounds if "16R big hit", 16 rounds if "16R big hit" each, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, the opening and closing pattern (the first large winning opening 2005 has a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)) to be executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" In the meantime, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the first large winning opening 2005 substantially in the opening / closing pattern (which is closed after becoming an open state capable of receiving the game ball). On the other hand, the opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept the game ball, or the first large winning opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (eg, seven) of game balls are accepted, or a predetermined number (eg, ten) of game balls are accepted to the second large winning opening 2006. If any of the conditions is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 in the opening / closing pattern in which the gaming ball is in the closed state which can not be received. In addition, the special lottery results in the case of "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept gaming balls, or is previously determined to the first large winning opening 2005 A condition is met that either a certain number (for example, seven) of gaming balls are accepted or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are accepted to the second large winning opening 2006 Then, the number of rounds in which the opening and closing pattern for making the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is executed may be taken as a substantial special lottery result, and the number determined in advance to the first large winning opening 2005 as a special lottery result (for example, , 7) If any condition of game ball acceptance or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls accepted to the second big winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the game ball is not accepted closed. Opening and closing pattern to be in the state and opening and closing pattern to be executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first large winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds In the meantime, the game ball may be provided with a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern which can be opened and then closed after the game ball can be received. For example, a special lottery result "8R big hit with 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls can be received in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening If any of the predetermined number (for example, 10) game balls are accepted or not satisfied, the open / close pattern for making the game balls into the non-acceptable closed state is repeated four times, Opening and closing patterns executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for the first large winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds), The opening and closing pattern) may be repeated four times after the game ball can be opened and then closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second large winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second large winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of a "big hit", for example, the first round (1R eyes) is opened by the second large winning opening 2006a to make it possible to accept the game ball, to be closed by the satisfaction of the condition to make it unacceptable, and then to be acceptable. When the second lower large winning opening 2006b is opened and the next round (the second R) which enables the game ball to be accepted is started until the second interval (during interval), and the second lower large winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper large winning opening 2006a is reopened to make it possible to receive the game ball. Then, the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until the predetermined number of rounds of digestion. As a result, in the second attack passage 2543a, during the "big hit", either of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is ready to receive the game ball, so this state If the game ball is distributed in the second attack passage 2543a by hitting the right, the game ball will always be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006, and the game ball will not be missed, and the player will be entertained. Can.

  Further, in this embodiment, in some of the plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time reduction control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-short time state (the state where the short time control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where time reducing control is being executed), time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-short time state (the state where the short time control is not executed), the time short control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where time reducing control is being executed), time reducing control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability untimely state (the state where both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improvement control after a big hit game If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, do not execute time saving control after the big hit game. On the other hand, in a state in which probability improvement control is being executed or time-shortening control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improvement control after a big hit game. In the case of a big hit, time saving control is performed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation display executed on the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 and the reception of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 The variation display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display is stopped by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first The first start is performed until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display is stopped and displayed (the second special lottery result is suggested) by the reception of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Because it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) before the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the suggestion of the result or the second special lottery result is completed ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the fact that the game ball received by the second starting opening 2004 is detected, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) is stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. Note that the maximum number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four each, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are played Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension. In addition, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, regardless of the reception timing of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed with priority over the symbol.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator), repeatedly turning on and off predetermined time It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and indicates a special lottery result by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of stopping.

  On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is indirectly controlled based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control substrate 1310, and the special lottery result is Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) The variation display of the decorative symbol row is started, and then the stop display is sequentially displayed (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) based on the special random number (the first special random number, the second special random number) acquired at the start winning occurrence, the plurality of decorative symbol rows change After being displayed, an effect image which is displayed in a stopped state so as to suggest special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display. Generally, the player pays attention to the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 because it is easy to see large.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, and the finalized image The time until the is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by main liquid crystal display device 1600, peripheral control board 1510, the decoration of center character 2500, the back left, according to the special lottery result drawn. Inside decoration unit 3050, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and back lower front movable effect unit 3500 etc. A light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained also by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a flowchart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers and RAM as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that is being The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to the operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined that the above-mentioned data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is performed to save information (for example, various flags and the like) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch is not operated, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU in the backup processing is referred to without performing the initialization processing (step S1). And executing recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) to be subjected to a lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). A random number, a second special random number), a fluctuating random number to be subjected to lottery processing for a fluctuating time required for a fluctuating display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), corresponding to a fluctuating display of the special symbol In the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, reach (in a state where the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped by the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not stopped yet, left, middle, etc. Reach random numbers to be subjected to lottery processing whether or not to synchronously display all the decorative symbols on the right so as to become the same symbol, if determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number Symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) to be used for lottery processing to determine the type, lottery processing according to the chance to hit the second start opening door member 2549 It has a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers and the like.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 143 (b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, the second Detection signals from various switches such as the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, and the like are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above special symbol Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, the first showing the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to the hit which becomes the operation trigger of the second start opening door member 2549. . Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the second starting opening door member 2549 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. Is configured to execute (so-called short time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, and the normal fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol When this is the case, such a short time is realized by extending the opening time of the second start port 2004 and increasing the number of times the second start port 2004 is opened.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The command set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as contact information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) or the like supplied to the hole management computer next as the process of step S18. .

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the large winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the on state, the above payout control is performed so that the winning balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. The dispensing control command is output to the substrate 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834 so as to pay out the winning balls to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes storage processing of checking increase and decrease of the number of holdings as processing of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is firstly controlled by the first starting opening sensor 2104. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2551 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2004 is entered) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that it is controlled to the big hit game is set (step S35), if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control that controls the big hit game The process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is "2R positive variation big hit", "8R normal big hit", and "8R positive variation big hit" The first large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close based on the above, and the second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close based on the indication of "10R probability variation big hit". In addition, based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol is "2R normal big hit" based on that became a mode that suggests opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005, "4R The second big winning opening on the basis of becoming a form that suggests "5R definite variation big hit", "6R definite variation big hit", "7R definite variation big hit", "8R definite variation big hit", and "16R definite variation big hit" Control opening and closing of 2006. In addition, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol ends the jackpot game based on the fact that "10R probability variation big hit" has become a mode, and the second special symbol fluctuation As a result of the lottery process for display mode at the time of display stop, "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "7R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit" When ending the big hit game based on having become a mode, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the first special symbol in the time saving state became the mode that suggests "8R certain variation big hit" When you finish the big hit game based on the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a state other than the normal state When you finish the big hit game based on the result of "2R probability variation big hit" is set, the time saving control (time saving control) is executed until the next big hit by setting the time saving flag. Do. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol during the time saving state ends the big hit game based on the fact that "8R normal big hit" is suggested The special symbol (first special symbol, the first special symbol, the first after the big hit game by setting "72" to the fluctuation number counter which counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Execute time saving control (control of time saving state) until the number of times of fluctuation of 2 special symbols) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol during the time saving state ends the big hit game based on the fact that "2R normal big hit" has become a mode, the second special Depending on the lottery result, set one of “18”, “36”, “54” and “72” in the fluctuation number counter and also set the time saving flag, and after the big hit game, the special symbol (first special symbol, the first The time saving control (control of the time saving state) is executed until the number of times of fluctuation of the 2 special symbols) reaches the number according to the second special lottery result among 18 times, 36 times, 54 times and 72 times. In addition, high probability flag is set when you finish the big hit game based on the big hit (2R big hit, 4R big hit, 5R big hit, 6R true big hit, 7R true big hit, 8R positive big hit, 10R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) By doing this, probability improvement control (control of high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high probability short time state if both the high probability flag and the short time flag are set, and the high probability short time state if only the high probability flag is set without the time short flag set. Control is performed, and if only the short time flag is set without setting the high probability flag, control is made to the low probability time short state (so-called short time state). If neither the high probability flag nor the time short flag is set, the low probability Control to the non-time-short state (so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set or not (step S36), the small hit execution flag is If it is set, small hit control processing (step S41) to control the small hit game is executed. In addition, in the small hitting control process, it is based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becoming the aspect which suggests "small hitting" Control the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005.

  Further, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small hit running flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38) on condition that it is "0" (step S37) (second special symbol hold) On the condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), it depends on the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 2104 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. In step S41, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first special hold number counter to indicate the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display start of the first special symbol on hold: Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as each random number thus acquired Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the start of variation display of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44, the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, the main control MPU performs a big hit or a small hit on the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not to be the type of big hit if it is a big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 After the effect pre-determination process of determining prior determination information such as the type etc. before starting variable display according to the start winning combination (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2551 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 146. In step S51, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly start the variable display start of the second special symbol in the state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as each random number acquired in this way Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S52 to step S54, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether it will be a big hit or a small hit by comparing it with the fluctuating random number, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, reach as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or a small hit The effect is executed or the type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage process, a high probability flag indicating that control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first It is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing with one special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3857-3946) is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 152 (A) to be described later (see FIG. 152A) and compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) of low probability and low probability is set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 152 (A) at the time of low probability described later) and the jackpot judgment value to be compared with the first special random number. The same random number is used. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, whether or not to be a big hit is accurately identified, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as predetermination information, not a big hit It can be classified as either "off" or "reach 1 to 4".

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the same disturbance is generated regardless of whether the high probability flag is set or not. It is also specified whether or not it will be a small hit by comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number. These high probability or low probability small hit judgment values (3800 to 3812) are set in the high probability or low probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 152A) described later, and the first special random number is determined. The same random value as the small hit judgment value to be compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a small hit, and "big hit 9 to 12" in which a small hit is included as the predetermination information It can be classified.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that control of a high probability state is being performed is If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value It is determined whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing the second special random number with the second special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3857-3946) is the same as the big hit judgment value to be compared with the second special random number set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 152 (A) described later). The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) of low probability and low probability is a jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 152A) at low probability described later and compared with the second special random number. The same random number is used. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a big hit, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as the prior determination information. It can be classified as either "off" or "reach 1 to 4".

  In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 is not performed in the time saving state (time saving) in which the time saving control is performed. There is. On the other hand, in the effect pre-determination process executed based on the game ball being received in the second start port 2004, the above time saving control is not performed in the non time saving state (non time saving) that is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when controlled to the non-time-short state, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 is executed, and the time-shorted state is controlled. In this case, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the game ball being accepted to the second start port 2004 is performed.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big win is identified by comparing the first special random number and the prior determination table, the determination value indicating which big hit When the big hit type is identified by comparing with the first symbol random number and the big hit is identified by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, a decision indicating which big hit is to be made The type of big hit is identified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, a determination value indicating that a special 1 (2R probability variation big hit) will be a big hit by matching the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) to be described later. It is considered as the same random number as the judgment value (0-16) which shows that it becomes a big hit of specific 1 among judgment values to be compared with one symbol random number, and it is specified 6 (8R probability variation big hit by matching with the first special random number ) Or a non-specific 2 (8R normal big hit) judgment value indicating that it will be a big hit among the judgment value set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later and compared with the first symbol random number It is considered as the same random value as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) which shows that it becomes big hit of specified 6 or non specified 2 and it matches with the first special random number and the big hit of specified 7 (10R certain variation big hit) The judgment value indicating that the The same random number value as the judgment value (155-159) which shows that it becomes big hit of specific 7 among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) and compared with the first symbol random number It is done.

  Similarly, in the predetermination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that a big hit is identified by comparing the second special random number and the predetermination table, a determination indicating which big hit is to be made. Indicates the type of jackpot by comparing the value and the second symbol random number, and identifying the type of jackpot by identifying the type of jackpot by comparing the second special random number and the predetermination table. The type of the jackpot is identified by comparing the determination value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that a specific 1 (2R probability variation big hit) or a non-specific 1 (2R normal big hit) will be a big hit by matching the second special random number is a symbol determination table to be described later (FIG. C) See the judgment value that is set in (c) and is compared with the second symbol random number, and the same random value as the judgment value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it will be a jackpot of specified 1 or non-specified 1 And match the second special random number 2 (4R probability variation big hit), 3 (5R probability variation big hit), 4 (6R probability variation big hit), 5 (7R probability variation big hit), 6 (8R probability variation big hit) Judgment value which shows that it becomes big hit of will be big hit of specific 2-specific 6 among judgment values that are set in the symbol determination table (see (C) in below) which will be mentioned later (see (C)) Is the same as the judgment value (20-55) Judgment value which is a random number value of and indicates a big hit of specified 8 (16R probability variation big hit) by matching with the second special random number is set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later Among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number, the same random value as the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 8 is made.

  Moreover, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made, a plurality of reach effects are produced by comparing a change value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the change random number Specify which reach effect to perform and become a big hit. Specifically, in the big hit of the specific 7 and the specific 8, the judgment value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is a judgment that indicates that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is a random value identical to the value and indicates that super reach effect with a low probability of big hit (hereinafter referred to as weak SP reach), is judged to be compared with the fluctuation random number Among the values, it is a random number value identical to the judgment value indicating that the super reach production with low jackpot expectation degree is to be executed, and a specific superreach production with high jackpot expectation degree (hereinafter, also referred to as strong SP reach) Judgment values (30 to 216) indicating that non-super reach effect (also referred to as specific strong SP reach) is to be executed are specific super reach performances among judgment values to be compared with variable random numbers. Judgment value which is the same random value as the judgment value which indicates that the super reach effect with high expectation which will be high is to be executed is the same as the judgment value which indicates that certain super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects with high expectation In (217-240), among the determination values to be compared with the variable random number, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used.

  Also, in the specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 jackpots, the determination value (0-4) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is a determination that indicates that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is a random value identical to the value and indicates that super reach effect with a low hit probability is to be executed, is a super reach effect with a low hit probability among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (30-216) is a random number that is the same as the judgment value indicating that the execution is to be performed, and indicates that the super reach production with a high degree of expectation of big hit is to be executed other than the specific super reach effect. Among the judgment values to be compared, a judgment value identical to a judgment value indicating execution of a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation for big hit other than a specific super reach effect is taken as a large win A judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among super reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be performed among judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  In addition, in the specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot, the determination value (0-89) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is the determination value indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number The judgment value (90-189) which is the same random number value and indicates that the super reach effect with a low hit probability is to be executed executes the super reach effect with a low hit probability among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (190-216) which is set as a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that the player is to perform other than the specific super reach effect among the super reach effects having a high hit probability is compared with the change random number. The judgment value is the same random value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a high degree of expectation for big hit other than the specific super reach effect is to be executed, The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high degree of expectation for hitting is to execute a specific super reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random numbers. The same random value as the indicated judgment value is used.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the prior determination table, the type of the jackpot is accurately identified and determined in advance. As information, "big hit 1" to be a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from normal reach, "big hit 2" to be a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from weak SP reach, strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach The "big hit 3" which makes the big hit of the specific 7 or the specific 8 "big hit 4" which makes the big hit of the specific 7 or the specific 8 from the specific strong SP reach, the specific 2 to 6 or the non specific 2 big hit of the normal reach Containing "big hit 5", specified 2 to 6 from weak SP reach or "big hit 6" containing non-specified 2 big hit, specified 2 from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach 6 or non-specific 2 jackpots included "big hit 7", specified 2 to 6 from specific strong SP reach or non-specified 2 big hit is included "big hit 8", specified 1 or non-specified 1 from normal reach A big hit "big hit 9", a specific 1 or non specific 1 big hit from a weak SP reach a "big hit 10", a specific 1 or non specific 1 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach It can be classified as either "big hit 11", or "big hit 12" as a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when a high probability flag indicating that control in a high probability state is being executed is set when the fact that it is out is specified, reach is displayed. Specify whether to display the reach by comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change and the reach random number to indicate that the high probability flag is not set and control of the short time state (low probability time short state) is executed If only the short time flag indicating that the user is doing is set, it is specified whether or not the reach is to be displayed by comparing the reach judgment value at the short time indicating the reach when displaying the reach with the reach random number. When the probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach random value is compared with the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of this probability change is set to the same reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. The reach judgment value (0-5) at that time is a random value identical to the reach judgment value set in the reach judgment table (see FIG. 152 (B)) at the time of short, which will be described later. The reach judgment value (0-6) at the time is set to the same random judgment value as the reach judgment value set in the normal reach judgment table (see FIG. 152 (B) described later) and compared with the reach random number . Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether reach effect is to be executed as the game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when it is not a big hit. It can be classified into any of “reach” in which reach is not displayed (execution of reach effect) as determination information, and “reach 1 to 4” in which reach is displayed (execution of reach effect).

  In addition, the reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of short time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and reach random number match, it is classified whether reach is displayed (execution of reach effect) in any of the gaming states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is determined whether the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs reach effect as a game effect in any of the gaming states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal It can be identified.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the reach effect is performed as the game effect performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed and the change random number The mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparing. Specifically, the judgment value (0-163) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number The judgment value (164-222), which is a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that the execution is to be performed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low degree of expectation for big hit is to be performed, is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) Among the judgment values set in) and compared with the fluctuating random number, the judgment value is the same as the judgment value indicating execution of the super reach effect with low expectation of big hit, and specified among the super reach effects with high degree of hit expectation Judgment values (223-235) indicating that other than the super reach effect of are executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. The judgment value set in) is the same random value as the judgment value indicating execution of super reach effect with high expectation for big hit other than specific super reach effect among judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and the big hit expectation degree Judgment values (236-240) indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among the high super reach effects are determined to be set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the change random number Of the values, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used. Therefore, by comparing the variation random number and the prior determination table in step S61, the type type of the game effect to be executed is accurately identified, and the normal reach effect is executed as the prior determination information, "reach 1" "Leach 2" which performs low super reach production, "Leach 3" which performs super reach production with high expectation of big hit (except for specific super reach production), super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified into any of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it can be classified as any of “reach 1” to “reach 4” as the prior determination information.

  As described above, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers As a result of comparison with the variable random number), whether it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The reach effect is executed, or the prior determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is specified, and as shown in FIG. 148 (B), “previous”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12 as the prior determination information. And “reach 1” to “reach 4” are classified into any of 17 types.

  Then, in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the identified pre-determination information (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit The reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed, and the type of the acquired special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And the number of reservations (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number, and the predetermination command according to is set. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information and the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the number of first special symbol held A first special symbol advance determination command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). Then, the advance determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), whereby the start opening where the start winning is generated (first start port 2002, second start Whether or not to display as a big hit or small hit the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the start winning combination that is generated in addition to the number of reservations stored corresponding to the start opening) If there is a big hit type, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, or if the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the prior determination information such as the type type of game effect to be executed The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information on the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second for storing prior determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol A reserve storage area is provided. Further, the first pending storage area and the second pending storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of pending, and the peripheral control MPU takes the first prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the (first) storage area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and the variation pattern command (1st variation pattern command to notify the variation display start of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol of variation pattern command to notify the variation display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the start of fluctuation display is received, the first storage area (if the first fluctuation pattern command is received, the first storage of the first reserved storage area according to the fluctuation pattern command received Area, discard the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the second reserved storage area if the second variation pattern command has been received, and discard the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area (N = 2 to 4) If it has received one variation pattern command, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the first pending storage area, and if it has received the second variation pattern command, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the second pending storage area The prior determination information is moved to the (N−1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (the prior determination information stored in the pending storage area is shifted). In addition, it is possible to specify whether to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by the fluctuation pattern command (whether it is the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command And shift the prior determination information stored in the first reserved storage area when it is specified to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command. When it is specified that the variable display of the second special symbol is started based on the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the second reserved storage area is shifted. Thereby, the prior determination information of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start is generated and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information Become so.

  In this example, the random number is the same as the jackpot judgment value of the advance judgment table and the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the big hit decision value of the prior decision table includes only a part of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table, or a part or all of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table and the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table It may be configured to include a number of random values, and the degree of possibility of becoming a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of outlier judgment values (which may include a small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value can be respectively discriminated as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group The high probability random number determining means, wherein the ratio to the above outlier judgment value of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value which is made distinguishable as above, is set higher than the ratio of the above big hit judgment table where the above big hit winning probability is decided. Of the random numbers obtained by the means, the first special random number and the second special random number are classified as either the above-mentioned out-of-range determination value or the above-mentioned big-off determination value Value of the high probability random number provided to the same judgment while belonging to the high probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the out judgment value are mixed. The pseudo probability precedent judging means capable of executing an advance judgment on the degree of expectation (pseudo winning probability) related to the big hit in each of the judgment processing in the pending state by judging whether there is any. The degree of expectation regarding the winning of the big hit may be determined in advance by the pseudo probability preceding determination means.

  In this way, by providing means for determining the high probability random number having the big hit judgment value and the negative judgment value mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the success result of the big hit judgment still in the pending state may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, with regard to the degree of expectation (pseudo-wining probability) relating to the above-mentioned big hit corresponding to the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the falling judgment value in the high probability random number determination means The precedent determination can be made executable. For example, prior to the execution of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (digestion of the judgment processing), the prior judgment that the success random number provided for the big hit judgment is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (specific hit judgment value) was not made When the decision processing based on a random value (a value belonging to a low probability random number group which is paired with a high probability random number group) which is not the precedently determined special hit judgment value is expected, the expectation pertaining to the jackpot winning It is determined that the degree (pseudo-wining probability) is lower than the above-described jackpot expectation (wining probability) (pseudo-decided winning probability).

  According to the prior determination method for such a high probability random number group, even when the specific determination process is put on hold, the big hit determination is maintained in the unexecuted state (hold). The anticipation degree (pseudo-wining probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold digestion. Will be

  FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing etc. for the display mode at the time of stop of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)
5. The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit displays the above-mentioned first special symbol display mode when the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 143).

  FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether the fluctuation display start of the first special symbol is in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the pending state, then it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control MPU as the processing of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first one stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start-up winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display start is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) at the present gaming state (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. The big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is in the low probability state (step S111), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 152 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 152 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) The jackpot determination table for low probability used for the game and the jackpot determination table for high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability time short state) are provided. And, in the big hit judgment table at low probability, like the above-mentioned prior judgment table, it matches with the big hit judgment value which shows that 10 kinds of first special random numbers are won as a big hit, and 13 kinds of first special random numbers are small The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the player has won a hit, and to match the out determination value indicating that the first special random numbers of 3924 types are the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In this low probability big hit judgment table, like the above-mentioned prior judgment table, it matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won as a big hit, and 3937 second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that

  Further, in the big hit determination table at high probability, like the above-mentioned prior determination table, 90 types of first special random numbers including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at low probability Matches the jackpot determination value, matches the small hitting judgment value indicating that the 19 types of the first special random numbers have won in the small hitting, and the 3838 first special random numbers match the leaving determination value. One special random number is associated with each other. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability short time state And 9) of the short time state (low probability time short state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the high probability big hit judgment table to be referenced to compare with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, 90 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table are the same as the prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and to match with the departure judgment value indicating that the second special random number of 3857 types is the above-mentioned departure.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115 ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S116), the 1st special read out at step S102 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing If it is determined as a small hit as a result of comparison with the random number (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is won for the small hit is set, and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of comparison between the selected big hit judgment table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 152 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 152 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is a probability variation used when the gaming state is a probability variation (high probability non-short status, high probability short status) Reach judgment table at the time, reach judgment table at short time to be used when the game state is short time (low probability time short state), and used when the game state is normal time (normal state: low probability non-short time state) And a reach determination table at a normal time. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation, similarly to the above-mentioned prior determination table, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number matches reach indicating that the reach random number does not reach 238 The reach random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above.

  In addition, in the reach determination table at the time of short time, similarly to the above-described prior determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation reach The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the time-short time (low probability time-short state) than in the probability variation (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the probability change time and the short time are reached similarly to the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the indicated reach determination value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time (low probability time short state).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the reach is determined to be out of step (step S120a), the variation Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 153. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 152 (C). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (C), in the symbol determination table, each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, identification as in the prior determination table above) 4 6R probability variation big hit, specified 5 7R probability variation big hit, specified 6 8R probability variation big hit, specified 7 10R probability variation big hit, non-specified 1 2R normal big hit, non specified 2 8R normal big hit) to a random number The random number and the second symbol random number are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of the present example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, 2R big hit game is executed, probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game to the next big hit If there is a game state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state, low probability time short state), the specific 1 2R probability variation that executes time reduction control until the next big hit Big hit 2. The 2nd big winning opening 2006 is controlled by opening and closing in a mode that the game ball can enter, 4R big hit game is executed, after the 4R big hit game is over, until next big hit from probability improvement control and time saving control Specific 2 4R probability variation big hit that performs both 3. The 2nd big winning opening 2006 is controlled by opening and closing in the manner that the game ball can enter, and 5R big hit game is executed, after the 5R big hit game is over, with probability improvement control and time saving control until it becomes big hit next time Specific 3 5R probability variation big hit that performs both Opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006 in a manner that the game ball can enter to execute the 6R big hit game, execute the 6R big hit game and finish the next big hit until it becomes the next big hit Specific 4 6R probability variation big hit that performs both Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter and execute the 7R big hit game, and after the 7R big hit game is over, the probability improvement control and time saving control from the end to the next big hit Specific 5 7R probability variation big hit that performs both If it is the first special lottery result, the opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 is performed in a mode that the game ball can enter, and 8R big hit game is executed, and the 8R big hit game is over and until the next big hit Probability improvement control is performed, and if time reduction control is performed at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) time reduction control is performed until the next big hit, and if it is the second special lottery result Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter the 8R big hit game and execute the 8R big hit game and then the probability improvement control and time saving control until the next big hit Specific 6 8R probability variation big hit that performs both Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter and execute the 10R big hit game, and after the 10R big hit game is over, it is between probability improvement control and time saving control until the next big hit. Specific 7 10R probability variation big hit to do both 8. Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter the 16R big hit game and execute the 16R big hit game and finish the next big hit until it becomes the next big hit with probability improvement control and time saving control Specific 8 16R probability variation big hit that performs both By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, 2R big hit game is executed, and probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit after the 2R big hit game is over If there is time reduction control at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) 2R big hit after the end of the big hit game variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) a predetermined number of times ( Unspecified 1 2R Normal Big Hit that executes time-saving control until it is executed 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times). By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a mode that the game ball can enter, 8R big hit game is executed, probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit after ending 8R big hit game If there is a time-saving control at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) after the end of the 8R big hit game variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times Time-saving control is performed until it is decided to be one of the 10 types of non-specific 2 8R normal big hits 10 types of big hits.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of big hit and the determination ratio are different I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, the identification 6 8R probability variation big hit, the identification 7 10 R probability variation big hit, non While the distribution of the judgment value is set for the special 2 8R big hit, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is a specific 1 2R positive variation big hit, a specific 2 4R positive variation big hit, a specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, specific 4 6R probability variation big hit, specific 5 7R probability variation big hit, specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, specific 8 16R probability variation big hit, non-specific 1 2R regular big hit for the distribution of judgment value set It is done.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, the big hit game (the game ball can enter) In the embodiment, the so-called right-handed game is performed, in which the game ball is hit to the right in front view than the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the center character 2500. In the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center character 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. Then, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, the second large large opening 2006 is aimed at and the game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500. It is supposed to win the prize opening 2006 by all means. Therefore, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, the game balls hit in the right hitting game area 2540 are not wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1111 (2543 c)), It is possible to digest the jackpot game in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted on the front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position between the right hitting game area 2540 and the first big winning opening 2005, the game ball is an obstacle By touching the nail, the game ball is given various motions to flow down. Therefore, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, even if the game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first winning hole 2005 is won That is not limited, gaming balls that have not won the first large winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from an out port 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the gaming area 5a. As described above, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in the present embodiment, the gaming ball is more efficient than the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close. It becomes possible to win a prize in the second big winning prize port 2006, and it is possible to digest a big hit game in a short time.

  Further, in this example, in one round of the opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005, the condition for changing the first large winning opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state and the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second big winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are changed to the closed state about 30 seconds after being controlled to the open state, but even before that time When the number of game balls determined in advance is won in the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, the state is changed to the closed state. And, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first large winning opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2005 is changed to the closed state based on seven gaming balls having won in the first large winning opening 2005, In a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening 2006. Thus, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, only 7 game balls can be made to win the first big winning opening 2005 at the maximum and only winning balls for 7 winnings per round are obtained In the big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, up to 10 gaming balls can be made to win the second big winning opening 2006, and winning balls for 10 winnings per round can be won. As compared with the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing of the first jackpot 2005, the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing of the second jackpot 2006 can be expected to obtain more prize balls.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, if it is decided to be a specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, it is decided to be a 2R probability variation big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to a specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, it is an 8R probability variation big hit of the first special symbol If it is decided on the symbol and it is decided on the specific 7 10R probability variation big hit, it is decided on the 10 R probability variation hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided on the non specific 2 8R normal big hit, the first special symbol 8R usually Determine the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, the variation stop of the first special symbol The mode is determined to be a small hit symbol as an aspect of (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to be an outlying symbol as a mode at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol (step S126).

  And after the decision processing for the stop symbol is performed in this way, these lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach out, or out is indicated (stop symbol of the first special symbol) as processing of step S127 The judgment result notification command according to each of the lottery results is set so that the mode of (1) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S128. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, from the received judgment result notification command to the specific 7R 10R probability variation big hit among the big hit When it is specified, it is decided to be a 10R probability variation big hit symbol (combination in which the left middle right decoration symbol becomes all the specific odd symbols (for example "7")), and the 16R probability variation is specified when the specification 8 16R probability variation big hit is specified A big hit symbol (a combination of all left and right decorative symbols becoming a specific odd symbol (for example, "7") is decided, and at the end of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (at the end of game rendition) Display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination which becomes all the specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is the 10R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the first special lottery Among the big hit due to each of the result and the second special lottery result, the number of rounds is the largest, and the winning of the 10R big hit game where the winning of the game ball to the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 is easy is decided It can be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2 4R probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If you decide to 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decorative symbol of odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) and identify the specific 3 5R probability variation big hit among the big hit Is determined to be a combination of 5R probability variation big hit symbols (the combination of the same decorative symbols of odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. 4R probability variation big hit symbols in common) If you specified a big hit, it is a combination of 6R positive variation big hit symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combinations of the same decorative symbols. 4R positive variation big hit symbols and 5R positive variation big hit symbols) Determined, out of the big five of the big hit When you identify R random variation big hit, 7R probability variation big hit design (the combination of the same decorative design of odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. 4R positive variation big hit symbol, 5R positive variation big hit symbol, and If it is decided on 6R probability variation big hit symbols in common, and identifies the specific 6 8R probability variation big hits among the big wins based on the second special lottery result, 8R probability variation big hit symbols (“1”, “3”, “5” , A combination of the same odd decorative symbols of "7". 4R positive variation big hit symbol, 5R positive variation big hit symbol, 6R positive variation big hit symbol, and 7R positive variation big hit symbol (common to the symbol) and the fluctuation time specified from fluctuation pattern command The display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of (the end of the game effect). Thus, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. From the design, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 5 R probability variation big hit, the specific 4 6 R probability variation big hit, the specific 5 7 R probability variation big hit, the specific 6 8 R probability variation big hit can not be discriminated either, but the second large It is possible to determine to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game which controls opening and closing the winning opening 2006.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU is specified based on the first special lottery result among the big hit from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If the 8R probability variation big hit is specified, it is decided on the 8R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6" even number) and the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit among the big hit If you specify the 8R normal big hit symbol ("2", "4", "6" even combination of the same decorative symbol. 8R positive variation big hit symbol and common) is determined from the variation pattern command At the time when the fluctuation time has elapsed (when the game effect is ended), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of “2”, “4”, and “6” of the same same decorative symbol is stopped as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, identification is performed from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 6 The 8R probability variation big hit, 8R non-specific 2R normal big hit can not be determined either, it is determined whether to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game to open and close control the first big winning opening 2005 I can not do it.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU identifies the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If you decide on a 2R probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols determined in advance among the missing symbols (separating eyes). Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357"), and you identify a small hit Small hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols in the out-of-out symbol pattern (a broken line). 2R probability variation big hit symbol and common) is decided, when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (end of the game effect At the same time, the main LCD display device 1600 controls the display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" stops fluctuating as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is the 2R probability variation big hit or small hit of the specific 1 Can not be determined, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state also after the 2R big hit game using the first big winning opening 2005 (2R big hit game in which the game ball is difficult to enter). It is not possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these big hit games, in order to execute a difficult game effect to determine whether or not.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of a variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, is a disconnection with a reach when the reach is specified from the received determination result notification command. Design (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and if you identify an outset, a outlying design with no reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but left and right) The symbol is determined to be non-identical, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state is selected (step S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), select the small hit variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state If the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, if the normal release (the reach effect is not performed), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of release (shown in FIG. No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display (step S149). In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determined in this manner, after the start of the fluctuation display of the contents of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) The information etc. which show the fluctuation time until it stops the fluctuation display of (In this case, the first special symbol) are also included. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the change pattern command set in step S149, in addition to the start of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Change of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting variable display of contents and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the game effect executed by main liquid crystal display device 1600 It is designed to identify the fluctuation time until the display is stopped. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Thus, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display (variation display of the first special symbol) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variation display of the decoration symbol thereof) for the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern. It will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the above fluctuation It is stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, as in the above-described prior determination table, the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variation random number It is set to decide. Specifically, one of 164 types of variable random numbers coincides with the judgment value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects whose jackpot expectation is low Match the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the 18 kinds of variable random numbers coincide with the judgment value (223-240) indicating that any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability is performed. As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with one another. Note that the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, next, as the processing of step S151, the fluctuation number counter that counts the fluctuation number of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the big hit game. It is determined whether the counter value is "0". As described above, in the present example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, when executing time saving control at the time of winning, the special symbol (first The time reduction control is performed until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times), and the first special lottery result is 8R of non-specific 2 usually If it is a big hit, and time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, time reduction control until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game Do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1 2R normal big hit is finished in the big hit control processing, the number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) according to the second special lottery result is set in the fluctuation number counter. When ending the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit, “72” times are set in the fluctuation number counter. In step S151, it is determined whether the variable display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter has been executed after the big hit game. Then, if this counter value is not "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter after the big hit game is not executed, after decrementing the fluctuation number counter (subtract 1) (step S152) Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0" (step S153). As a result, if the same counter value is "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game, the end flag indicating that is set (step S154) .

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", that is, the fluctuation of the number of times the fluctuation number counter has already been set after the big hit game caused by nonspecific 1 and nonspecific 2 If the display is being executed, or if it is determined that the fluctuation number counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, that is, the fluctuation number counter is still set after the big hit game caused by the nonspecific 1 and nonspecific 2 If the variable display of the number of times is not performed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that point. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended. In addition, when executing time saving control from the end of the big hit game caused by the big hit of the specific 1 to the specific 8 until the next big hit, while setting the fluctuation number counter in the big hit control process, while setting 0 By setting the time saving flag, time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. The display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation count counter after the big hit game when the end flag is set, that is, non specific 1 and non specific 2 Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (step S185). ). As a result, after the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2, control of the low probability non-short state (normal state) will be executed .

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started (step S187). The standby time until start (time to display a message to start the big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). And while setting the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, the high probability flag is reset, the high probability flag is reset, and the time short flag is reset, the time short flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated such that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S190), this processing is ended. The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of big hit (2R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 5R positive variation big hit, 6R positive variation big hit, 7R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit , 16R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) are prepared individually. In step S187, depending on the type of big hit (2R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 5R positive variation big hit, 6R positive variation big hit, 7R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) Big hit start command (2R positive variable big hit start command, 4R positive variable big hit command, 5R positive variable big hit start command, 6R positive variable big hit start command, 7R positive variable big hit start command, 8R positive variable big hit start command, 10R positive variable big hit start command, 16R positive variable big hit Set start command, 2R normal big hit start command, 8R normal big hit start command). As a result, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating start of the small hit game (step S192), The standby time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the small hit game to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game instructed by the small hit start command is the main liquid crystal It is performed by the display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

[9. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 157, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set or not is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Control processing relating to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is serial for lamp driving board The game board side drive data for transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for transmitting from the I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is for the game board decoration drive board The door side to transmit drive signals from serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or to an electric drive source such as the vibration generator 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3 Door side comprising drive data and lighting signals to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, door side light emission data for outputting blinking signals or gradation lighting signals Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be sent to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, or to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 Processing such as transmitting to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the control unit serial I / O port or outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a notice of a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) used for the lottery process related to monochrome notice effect described later A process of updating the value of a random number counter or the like that generates a judgment random number is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[10. Monochrome notice production]
In the present embodiment, until the number of reservations based on the prior determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is digested, the variation display (the variation display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on the suspension is executed. Each time the notice effect made to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is changed from color to black and white (black and white), monochrome notice effect is executed before the final hold is digested. When all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by a monochrome preview effect, when the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the final hold (the variation display of the special symbol) is executed, An effect of entering the monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a monochrome advance notice execution process performed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 160 is an area occupancy pattern determination table used to determine an area occupancy pattern in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. FIG. 161 is an example showing a region for causing a notice effect to appear in the display region of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome notice effect. FIG. 162 and FIG. 163 are examples of effects when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, the number of holdings based on the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is digested. If it is decided to execute monochrome advance notice over a plurality of times during the variable display of the decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols), and if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice, the result of the monochrome advance announcement Control to determine whether to enter the black and white mode. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermination command has been transmitted from main control board 1310 based on the game ball having won in first start port 2002 or second start port 2004 (start condition established). (Step S1300). If it is determined in step S1300 that a preliminary determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome advance notice execution flag described later is set (step S1301). Then, if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (YES), all variation patterns for the already suspended portion are “normal” except for the suspension based on the new winning combination. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is "variation" (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), or if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set (NO), It transfers to step S1308.

  It should be noted that based on the fact that the main control board 1310 transmits a priori determination command based on the game ball winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), based on the winning. Pre-determination information on suspension (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, the reach production as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or a small hit If it is possible to specify or specify the type of game effect to be executed, etc., and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the predetermination command, it takes until it settles the hold based on the winning, The prior determination information specified from the prior determination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is specified that it is classified as "prevention" as the prior determination information, the fluctuation pattern executed in the hold does not form reach as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (executes the reach effect ), It is determined that it is a change pattern of "normal change" in which it is set to stop and display the lost symbol, and "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "as a prior decision information When it is identified that it is classified into any of “reach 4”, the fluctuation pattern executed in the hold forms reach as a fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and executes the reach effect, and the jackpot symbol ( In particular, it is a variation pattern of "reach fluctuation" in which it is set that the stop display of "big hit 1"-"big hit 12" or the lost design ("reach 1"-"reach 4") is set. It can be. Then, in step S1302, by specifying the type of fluctuation pattern based on the prior determination information stored in the RAM of peripheral control board 1510, all of the fluctuation patterns for the amount already reserved are "normal fluctuation". It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern of

  In addition, if it is determined in step S1302 that all of the fluctuation patterns of the already suspended portion are the fluctuation patterns of the “normal fluctuation” (YES), except for the suspension based on the new winning combination (YES), the prior judgment A monochrome advance notice determination table (not shown) used to decide whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect until the pending number based on the command is digested is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome advance notice determination table is compared with the monochrome advance decision determination random number read out from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (step S1304). Specifically, if the monochrome advance notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome advance notice determination table, it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES in step S1304), and if it does not match. It is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not to be executed (NO in step S1304). In addition, in the monochrome advance notice determination table, the monochrome advance notice effect according to whether the fluctuation pattern of the suspension based on the new winning is the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. It is determined whether or not to execute the command, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of judging that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" It is set to. However, in the monochrome advance notice determination table, whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the suspension based on the new winning combination is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. In the case of a big hit (or a small hit), it may be set such that the probability of performing monochrome advance notice effect is higher than in the case of a loss.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that a monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES), any one of a plurality of area occupancy patterns is used as a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the prior determination command. The area occupancy pattern determination table (FIG. 160) used to make the determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupation pattern, the announcement effect is made to appear in any area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 each time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is executed during the execution of the monochrome announcement effect. It is set whether or not to change the appearing advance notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupancy pattern determination table selected according to the hold number command is compared with the area occupancy pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine the type of the area occupancy pattern (step S1306). If it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed, a monochrome advance notice execution flag indicating that the monochrome advance notice effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

  On the other hand, except for the suspension based on the new winning in step S1302, one of the fluctuation patterns of the already suspended minute is not the fluctuation pattern of the “normal fluctuation” (the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” is included If it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not to be performed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome advance notice effect. As described above, only when it is determined in step S1302 that all of the fluctuation patterns of the already held fluctuation patterns are “normal fluctuation” fluctuation patterns, except for the suspension based on the new winning combination, the monochrome advance notice effect Although it is not possible to reach even the reach in the variation display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern of the “normal variation” by making it possible to carry out the “normal variation”, the expectation of becoming a big hit can not be raised. By executing the monochrome advance notice effect for the fluctuation pattern of "", there is a possibility that the black-and-white mode described later may enter, and the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode can be increased. It is possible to eliminate the tediousness of being

  The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the prior determination command, and one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns It is a table used to determine an occupancy pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), an area occupancy pattern determination table is used as an area occupancy pattern determination table used when suspension is added based on new winning when the number of reservations is 1. As shown in FIG. 160 (B), an area occupation pattern determination table is provided which is provided with a table in which 4 is set, and when the number of reservations is 2, suspension is added based on new winnings. A table in which area occupancy patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided, and an area occupancy pattern determination table used when suspension is added based on a new winning when the number of reservations is 3, as shown in FIG. 160 (C). As shown in the table, a table in which area occupation patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed each time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is executed during execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is set in which area of the area the advance notice effect is to appear and whether or not to change the appeared advance notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (A), while one pending is already digested, a notice effect is given to each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), it is set to appear, and while the two reservations already suspended are being digested, each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is notified. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), effects are set to appear in stages, and while the three reservations already suspended are being digested, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. The preview effects are set to appear in stages in each area.

  In addition, when the area occupancy pattern is determined, the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect (the hold that is determined to execute the monochrome advance notice effect when the hold is added based on the new winning) The area occupancy pattern that can be determined from the area occupancy pattern determination table is different depending on whether the fluctuation pattern of is the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” It has become. Specifically, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (A), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the fluctuation of “reach fluctuation” In the case of a pattern, one of the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4 is determined. Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 11 to 18 is determined. Also, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160C, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” is In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

  As described above, when the change pattern of the suspension causing the monochrome advance notice effect is the “normal change” fluctuation pattern, it is before the suspension triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance effect is digested. While the advance notice effect appears in each area of the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect (in this example, a point for the advance notice effect for a part or all of the advance notice effect made to appear) A part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome by preventing the stick from stabbing effect) and not changing some or all of the displayed preview effects from color to monochrome (black and white) It is not intended to be occupied by the notice effect of. In other words, by executing the cast of the monochrome advance notice effect, it does not actually enter the black and white mode while giving hope to enter the black and white mode.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of the "reach fluctuation", the main operation is performed before the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice is digested. A notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick pierces the notice effect) is executed for all the notice effects made to appear. At the same time, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect by changing the color of all the preview effects made to appear from color to monochrome (black and white). I am trying to plunge into the mode. That is, by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when entering the black and white mode, the reach is always formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of becoming a big hit can be enhanced. It has become. When a specific effect is executed on all of the notice effects made to appear in the respective display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect of the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is always monochrome. Because it is always occupied by and the black-and-white mode is always entered, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed when the advance notice effect appears. On the other hand, when the cast of the monochrome advance notice effect is executed, the black and white mode is not entered, and the reach is not formed as the variation display of the decorative pattern which is not the black and white mode (the reach effect is not executed), We can not increase our jackpot expectation. That is, when entering into the black and white mode, it is a state that suggests that the expectation of becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and when not entering the black and white mode, the expectation of becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that it is a state that suggests Further, in the monochrome preview effect, the preview effects appear in stages in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but by changing the appeared preview effects from color to monochrome (black and white) The advance notice effect of monochrome is gradually occupied in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the wider the area occupied by the advance notice effect of monochrome, the whole display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is By approaching the state occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering into the black and white mode. Also, when the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect made to appear is displayed in color as the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it is possible for the wide area to be occupied by the monochrome preview effect, and when the wide area is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Since it approaches the state where the entire display area is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering the black and white mode.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the main liquid crystal display is displayed when a portion of the already held pending is digested except for the pending triggered execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. There is an area occupancy pattern set in the display area of the device 1600 so as not to appear in the advance presentation effect. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), in the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11, 12, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. , 23 to 30, even if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the first hold that is already put on hold is digested. Instead, the advance notice effect is set to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the next hold that has already been held is digested. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B), area occupancy patterns 3, 4 and 17 to 22 have already been made in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C). A preview effect is made to appear in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 before the last pending hold is digested, and when the last held pending is digested. The preview effect is set so as not to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to know when the monochrome preview effect is started and when it is finished with respect to the suspension that has already been suspended, so it is possible to always play the game with the expectation that the monochrome preview effect will be executed. It can be done.

  Incidentally, in the area occupation pattern, an area where the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 161, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the upper part of the display area is the area A, the left of the display area is the area B, the lower part of the display area is the area C, the display area The right side of is set to the area D. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided, but may not be equally divided, and a part or all of the areas for causing the advance notice to appear is set to overlap, respectively. It may be

  Further, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a partial area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the next hold after the next hold is digested When being played, a new preview effect is set to appear in an area different from the area where the preview effect has already appeared. Then, until the notice effect occupies the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, new notice effect is set to appear stepwise in the area not occupied by the notice effect. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160C, after the advance effect appears in the area C in the area occupancy pattern 31, the area when the second pending pending is digested. The preview effect is made to appear in the area D different from C, and the preview effect appears in the areas A, B different from the areas C, D when the third hold that is already suspended is digested. It is like that. As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new preliminary announcement effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the preliminary announcement effect, so that the new preliminary announcement effect can be easily recognized. Even if various types of preliminary effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for the player to miss any of the preliminary effects. In addition, by enabling the preliminary announcement effect to gradually appear in the area not occupied by the preliminary announcement effect until the preliminary announcement effect occupies the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As long as there is a region not occupied by the preview effect, whether or not a new preview effect appears (a specific effect for the preview effect made the appearance (in this example, the point bar pierces against the preview effect In response to the execution of the staging effect, by changing the appearing prior presentation effect from color to monochrome (black and white), it is determined whether the area where the prior presentation effect appears is occupied by the preview effect of monochrome). It has become possible to bring attention.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance effect appears in a partial area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the next or subsequent hold pending is digested. The preview effect may be set to appear so as to include a part of the area where the preview effect has already appeared. For example, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160C, in the area occupation patterns 37 to 39, after the advance notice effect appears in any of the areas B, C, and D, the third one already reserved. When the hold is digested, the notice effect is made to appear on the entire screen of the display area so that the areas B, C, and D are included.

  Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table, no advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (this example) is applied to the entire screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear. Then, an area occupancy pattern (for example, area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A) is set in which an effect in which a point stick pierces the entire screen (background image) is executed. . In such an area occupancy pattern, no advance notice effect appears in the areas A, B, C, and D, and a background image is displayed over the entire display area. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick sticks to a background image), it becomes possible for the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be occupied by a monochrome background image. ing. When the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the black and white mode is entered as in the case of being occupied by the monochrome preview effect. For this reason, when the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation of becoming a big hit can not be enhanced, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed in reverse. , Can increase expectations to rush into black and white mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed on the notice effect having the appearance (for example, an area in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A) The notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 than the occupancy pattern 4), and the specific effect is executed on the entire screen (background image) in which the notice effect does not appear. As a trigger, the case where the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by a monochrome background image (for example, the area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160A) is executed. Although the probability is low, the probability of becoming a big hit after the entry of the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, no advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect is not appeared. The probability of determining the area occupation pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. For this reason, even if no advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, there is a probability that a big hit will occur when the specific effect is executed by turning around (when the black and white mode is entered). It is possible to maintain high, big-hit expectations.

  Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, an area occupancy pattern (for example, an area occupancy shown in FIG. 160A) in which advance notice effects appear in each of the areas A, B, C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The area occupation pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In the area occupation pattern in which the notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear for the areas A, B, C, and D. And, even though it is a variable display of a single decorative symbol, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick is pierced for the advance effect) for all of the advance effects made to have appeared, It is possible for the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be occupied by monochrome preview effects. When one advance notice effect appears on the areas A, B, C, D (full screen) of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the areas A, B, C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , D (full screen) than when multiple advance notice effects appear, the probability of becoming a big hit after entering the black and white mode is higher, and the expectation of becoming the big hit is further raised when entering the black and white mode It is possible to

  Next, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process, until the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, step S1306 each time the start condition regarding the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is satisfied. The type of the notice effect to be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupying pattern of the monochrome advance notice effect is determined in When occupied by the preview effect, control is made to enter the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition regarding the change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the special symbol) (step S1308). If it is determined in step S1308 that a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (step S1309). If the change start command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), and if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome advance notice execution processing is ended.

  Also, if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the main control board 1310 is changed based on the start condition regarding the change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the special symbol). By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is not digested (NO), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is selected based on the area occupancy pattern determined in step S1306. In the display area, the area corresponding to the remaining number of reservations until the suspension which is the trigger for execution of the monochrome preview effect is digested is determined as the area for causing the preview effect to appear, and the type of preview effect to be displayed in that area is A notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) used to determine the set notice effect pattern is selected. In this advance notice effect pattern, one or more types of advance notice effects are set so that the area determined as the area occupation pattern can be occupied. Then, based on the area determined as the area occupation pattern and the type of fluctuation pattern for the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice pattern determination table is selected, and the selected notice effect pattern decision table is selected. Are compared with the notice effect pattern determination random numbers read out from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of notice effect effect for occupying the area determined as the area occupation pattern (notice effect pattern) is determined (step S1311). Here, it is before the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, and the variation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that the decoration is made based on the variation pattern of “normal variation”. While the variable display of the symbol is executed, the type of the notice effect determined in step S1311 is made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while the variable display of such a decorative symbol is executed. The effect is executed (step S1312).

  The notice effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and the notice effect pattern in which the type of the notice effect to be displayed in the area is set. Is a table used to determine the Specifically, a table in which a notice effect capable of occupying the area A is set as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is provided, and a table in which a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set as a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A table provided with a notice effect capable of occupying the area C is provided as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The preview effect putter used when the advance effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a decision table, announcement attraction that can be occupied it is set tables is provided a region D.

  In addition, when the notice effect appears across a plurality of areas such as the area A and the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect capable of occupying both the area A and the area B Alternatively, a notice effect pattern determination table is provided in which a combination of a notice effect capable of occupying the area A and a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set. That is, the advance notice effect at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect only needs to occupy the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and is a combination of the advance notice effect appearing across a plurality of areas and a plurality of advance notice effects It may be.

  Here, the advance notice that can be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is similarly the main liquid crystal display other than at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is possible to make it appear in a part or all of the display area of the device 1600. As described above, it is determined whether to perform each of a plurality of types of preview effects based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not to be a big hit and whether to perform reach effects other than at the time of executing the monochrome advance effects. Depending on the type of the announcement effect, there is a high-predictive notice effect that is a big hit, and a low-predictive notice effect that is a big hit, and when a high-predictive effect that is a big hit appears, the big hit Will be able to increase their expectations.

  Then, when determining the type of preview effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when executing the monochrome preview effect, the preview with a low expectation of becoming a big hit other than the time of executing monochrome preview effect. I try to determine the production with high probability. As a result, even if a low-announcement low-announcement announcement with a big hit appears except when the monochrome announcement effect is executed, the high-peak expectation can not be enhanced, but a low-ocket announcement with a low hit expectation appears. After that, when the announcement effect made to appear has changed from color to monochrome (black and white), it can be determined that it is executed as part of the monochrome announcement effect, not just the announcement effect, and the expectation of becoming a big hit Even if a low preview effect appears, it is possible to increase the expectation that the monochrome preview effect will be performed.

  In addition, when the type of preview rendering to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311 is determined during execution of the monochrome preview rendering, the variation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview rendering is Depending on whether it is a variation pattern of "normal variation" or a variation pattern of "reach variation", the probability of determining a high-predictive announcement effect with a high probability of becoming a big hit other than when the monochrome advance announcement effect is executed differs I have to. Specifically, when the change pattern of the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the change pattern of the "reach change", the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is more than that of the "normal change" change pattern It is intended to determine with high probability the high-announcement notice effects that are expected to be a big hit other than time. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", since the black and white mode is entered, the jackpot of the expectation of becoming a big hit After a high preview effect appears, when the released preview effect changes from color to monochrome (black and white), the probability of entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview effect increases, and the expectation of entering the black and white mode is Will be able to enhance.

  In addition, at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, the fluctuation pattern for the hold triggered execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is “ Among the fluctuation patterns of "reach fluctuation", depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with high expectation that is a big hit, or a fluctuation pattern that performs reach effect with a low degree of expectation that is a big hit. The probability of determining a high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit other than at the time of execution of the advance effect is made different. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit among the fluctuation patterns of “reach fluctuation” (for example, Of the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4" as the pre-judgment information, "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit 7", "big hit 8", "big hit 11", When it is a fluctuation pattern that performs reach presentation with a low degree of expectation that becomes a big hit, when it is specified that it is classified as any of “big hit 12”, “reach 3”, “reach 4” For example, of the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as the prior determination information, "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5", "big hit 6", "big hit 9" ","Big Higher than expected when the black and white notice effect is performed but is more likely to be a big hit than when it is specified that it is classified as any of “10”, “reach 1”, “reach 2”) It is made to decide with high probability. For this reason, when the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and the black-and-white mode is entered, the high-predictive notice to be a big hit is changed from color to monochrome (black and white) Because of the change, the probability of executing a reach presentation with a high expectation of becoming a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than the case of entering the black and white mode, and a high hitting expectation can be enhanced.

  When the type of preview effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311 is determined at the time of execution of the monochrome preview effect, the lottery result for the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome preview effect is a big hit Depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it may be determined according to whether it is a loss or a loss, and according to whether it is a loss or a loss, a high-preceding notice effect with high expectation of becoming a big hit other than at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect The probability of determining may be different. Specifically, when the lottery result for the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a big hit, the notice effect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit other than when the monochrome advance effect is executed than when it is lost May be determined with high probability. Even in such a case, if the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white), the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit is from color to monochrome By changing to (black and white), the probability of becoming a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when entering the black and white mode, and it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation.

  Further, at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, as the advance notice effect to be displayed in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, step-up advance notice effect can also be used. With the step-up notice effect, effect images corresponding to each of a plurality of steps are provided, and based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not to be a big hit, and whether or not reach effect is performed, from the first step among the plurality of steps It is an effect which makes an effect image corresponding to a predetermined stage appear one by one. Further, in the step-up notice effect, the higher the predetermined level is, the higher the expectation for becoming a big hit is set. Then, each of the effect image corresponding to the first step, the effect image corresponding to the second step, the effect image corresponding to the third step, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth step among the plurality of steps, for example, the main liquid crystal display The display area of the device 1600 is made to appear in the area A, the area B, the area C, and the area D, and the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the notice effect as the step-up notice effect progresses. The area is increased.

  In the case where the above step-up notice effect is used, an effect image corresponding to the first step among a plurality of steps, an effect image corresponding to the second step, an effect image corresponding to the third step, and a fourth step are supported. Each of the effect images is caused to appear, for example, in area A, area A, B, area A, B, C, area A, B, C, D in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and step up When the stage of the preliminary rendering has progressed, by displaying the effect image in an area larger than the area before the stage proceeds, the area occupied by the preliminary rendering in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is increased. You may In addition, when the first step of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image is made to appear in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when proceeding to the second step, the area A to the area B The effect image is enlarged, and when advancing to the third stage, the effect image is expanded from the area A, B to the area C, and when advancing to the fourth step, the effect image is extended to the areas A, B, C, D When the stage of the step advance notice production progresses by expanding the area where the notice image of the notice effect is displayed, the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is increased. You may do it. In addition, even if the stage of the step-up notice effect has progressed, if the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 does not increase, the step is achieved by increasing the probability of becoming a big hit. As well as whether or not the stage of the advance presentation proceeds, attention can be paid to whether the area occupied by the advance presentation increases.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is digested (YES), the main processing is performed before the hold triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is digested, When all of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, an effect of entering the monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. When the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not partially or entirely occupied by the monochrome preview effect (it was a cast of monochrome preview effect), the main liquid crystal display device without entering the monochrome mode An effect of setting the background image in the display area 1600 as color and maintaining the background image at the normal time is executed (step S1313). Also, if it is determined that the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, the monochrome advance notice execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

  As described above, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome and the black-and-white mode is entered when the black-and-white mode is entered. If not, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is colored, and the number of colors of the background image is different, as in the background image in the normal mode (other than the black and white mode). In this way, when entering the monochrome mode by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, a reach is necessarily formed as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the monochrome mode, and the reach effect is executed, so a big hit is made. Although the expectation can be raised, the background image becomes monochrome, and the number of colors of the background image is smaller than that at the normal time, so that the player can be given an impression different from that at the normal time, resulting in a big hit. It can be combined with expectations to increase expectations. In addition, when entering the black and white mode, the background image becomes monochrome, but on the front of the background image, as in the normal case, make it appear after fluctuating display of the decorative pattern or after entering the black and white mode By displaying in color the images of the preview effects that can be played, it is possible to make the images related to the lottery results contrast with the background image. That is, when the image enters the black-and-white mode, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the image related to the lottery result, and when the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol appears or the image of the notice effect appears, On the other hand, the player can be made to pay more attention than usual. On the other hand, when the black and white mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol (the reach effect is not performed), and it is impossible to increase the expectation of becoming a big hit. For this reason, when it does not enter into the black and white mode, it can not be expected in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and since the probability of appearance of the image of the preliminary effect is low, it can not be expected in the preliminary effect but It becomes a color, and the number of colors of the background image is larger than that in the black and white mode, so that the player can be given a lively impression even without the appearance of the notice effect image etc. It can be reduced.

  A specific rendering example of the monochrome preview rendering will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In FIGS. 162 and 163, when the number of reservations is 2, the variation pattern for the suspension added based on the new winning (retention triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is the variation pattern of “reach variation” (Classified as any of "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as prior determination information), and the area occupancy pattern determination table for 2 o'clock on hold shown in FIG. 160 (B) The case of using the area occupancy pattern 15 is shown. In the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock of the hold, while the first hold that has already been held is digested, the notice effect is produced in the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is set to appear, and while the second hold that has already been held is digested, a notice effect is set to appear in areas C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is.

  First, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), when the pending number is 2 and the pending is added based on the new winning, the first pending that has already been suspended is digested. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock holding time, the area among the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A preview effect across A and B appears. Specifically, as a preview effect over the areas A and B, an effect is performed that a person who is playing mahjong discards the mahjong roar and yells at "This is how it is!". At this time, during the execution of the preview effect over the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 162C, an effect (specific effect) in which a point rod of mahjong is pierced against the appearing preview effect is performed By doing this, the appearing preview effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, in the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, areas A and B will continue to be occupied by the monochrome preview effect, and as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of "153"). With regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is prevented that the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to visually recognize by maintaining the color tone.

  Next, before the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 162E, the character “B & W chance!” Is approximately in the center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The small and light gray level is displayed, and the mah-jongg point bars appear on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the notice effect across the areas A and B is simple. It can be recognized that the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect has been started, not the advance notice effect (the advance notice effect other than the monochrome advance notice effect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162F, the next hold (the second hold that has already been held when the hold that triggered the monochrome advance presentation effect is added) is digested by In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again. At this time, the mah-jongg point bars appearing on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 scatter outside the area of the display area. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 162 (G), based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold, the area among the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A preview effect across C and D appears. Specifically, as a preliminary effect across areas C and D, an effect is performed in which a person who is playing mahjong shouts "Can win!" While looking at the mahjong pot. At this time, during the execution of the preview effect across the areas C and D, as shown in FIG. 162H, an effect (specific effect) in which a point rod of mahjong is thrust at the preview effect that is appearing is performed. By doing this, the appearing preview effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, the advance notice effect of monochrome occupies not only the regions A and B but also the regions C and D among the display regions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby all the display regions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The area is occupied by the monochrome announcement effect. Note that, in the case of a monochrome notice effect, the point bar does not stick to the notice effects appearing across the areas C and D, and a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is not occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it does not enter the monochrome mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), the text "B & W mode standby" is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect. It can be recognized that it is foreshadowed. Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of "153"). After that, before the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (K), the character “B & W mode entry” is in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By being displayed in a large size and in a darker and darker manner, it is possible to clearly recognize that the next time when the decorative symbol is displayed, the black and white mode will be entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (L), the next hold (the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is digested, so that in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It will be started again. At this time, the background image becomes monochrome by entering the black and white mode in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the game is performed by giving an impression different from the color which is the background image in the normal mode other than the black and white mode. Meet the expectations of Then, when the black-and-white mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 163 (M), based on the fluctuation pattern of the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect being the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”, Since a reach (in the present example, a “7” symbol) is formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol and the reach effect is performed thereafter, the expectation of becoming a big hit can be enhanced. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of "7" in this example), and when the lottery result is a loss, the variation of the decorative symbol The display will be stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the middle symbol other than "7").

  In addition, before and after the point bar of the mahjong is pierced against the preview effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing preview effect is displayed in color to monochrome (black and white (black and white The image itself, such as a character depicted as a preview effect, does not change. The data for specifying the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the data for specifying the color arrangement of the depiction are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, but in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect Data designating coordinate positions of depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be commonly used, and an increase in the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be prevented.

  Also, when the point bar of the mahjong sticks to the preview effect appearing in a part or the whole of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the area is occupied by the preview effect of monochrome. The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be indicated. For example, when the preview effect of monochrome occupies the areas A and B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600) By displaying “50%” as a percentage of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the percentage of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect and the percentage of the remaining area that the monochrome preview effect must occupy Can be clearly recognized. When displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome preview effect occupies a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In such a case, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can also be focused on, and the player can take a process until the monochrome preview effect is occupied. Can be viewed safely.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the variation display of the decorative symbol entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect is the target of the black and white mode, and the variation display of the decoration symbol entering the black and white mode ends. The black-and-white mode is also finished, but the black-and-white mode is continued not only for the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern that has entered the black-and-white mode but also for the fluctuation display of several decoration patterns after entering the black-and-white mode May be For example, even when the suspension is interrupted, the black and white mode may be continued until the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times. As described above, when the monochrome mode is continued over a plurality of times of variation display of the decorative symbol after entering the monochrome mode, even if the big hit is not obtained in the variation display of the ornamental symbol entering the black and white mode, By continuing the black-and-white mode, the expectation of becoming a big hit can be maintained by the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol from the next time onwards.

  In the above description, when the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the black and white mode is entered from the start of the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol. It is not limited. For example, monochrome preview effects are executed in one or more times of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by monochrome preview effects, that is, monochrome preview effects In the variation display of the decoration symbol at the time when the Occupied, the black and white mode is entered, and when the black and white mode is entered, the reach is formed (the reach effect is executed) in the variation display of the decoration symbol. The expectation of becoming a big hit can be heightened also for the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern at the time when the advance notice effect is occupied. Further, for example, among the preview effects that can be made to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation for becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( In the case where a specific high-expected advance notice effect displayed on the entire screen appears, the point region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed in all areas when the point bar of mahjong is stuck for the specific high-expected notice effect. By entering the black and white mode by being occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering the black and white mode even when the hold is not stored.

  The present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display 2000 Front unit 2500 Center character 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Back and back movable production unit 3110 Back and back first decoration (1st decoration, decoration member, decoration unit)
3111 first decoration surface 3112 second decoration surface 3114 sub liquid crystal display device (effect display device, decoration member, decoration unit)
3115 first hinge part 3120 back bottom second decoration (second decoration, decoration member, decoration unit)
3121 1st decoration surface 3122 2nd decoration surface 3124 2nd hinge part 3125 decoration body support axis (support axis, decoration unit)
3126 Second decoration side operation gear (lower shaft gear, decoration unit)
3127 Bearing member 3130 Rotational drive unit 3131 Rotational drive unit base 3131a Main part 3131b Subpart 3131c Upper bearing part 3131d Lower bearing part 3132 Rotational transmission member 3132a Sleeve part 3132b Connection part 3132c First decoration side operation gear (axial gear)
3133 1st drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 Back to back first drive motor (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Back and back second drive motor (lower drive motor, drive motor)
3142 Unit cover 3143 Rack member 3143a Rack gear 3150 Slide unit 3151 Unit base 3152 Slide guide 3153 Transmission gear member 3154 Drive gear 3155 Back lower third drive motor 3157 Slide cover

Claims (1)

A determination unit that determines whether it is a hit based on the establishment of the start condition;
Specific gaming state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state useful to the player when it is determined by the determination means that the game is a hit;
Providing an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a predetermined advance effect is performed .
The predetermined effect display area of the effect display means has a plurality of erosion areas, and the preliminary announcement effect image is made to appear in the form of eroding a part of the plurality of erosion areas ,
When all of the plurality of erosion areas of the predetermined effect display area are eroded, an erosion effect for recognizing that the whole is eroded is displayed across the plurality of erosion areas, and the erosion effect is displayed. After the symbol is stopped after stopping the symbol, the special effect state transition effect is displayed, which recognizes that the special effect state is to be shifted before the start of the fluctuation of the next symbol, and the predetermined In the case where all of the plurality of erosion areas in the effect display area are eroded, it is expected that the specific gaming state is controlled as compared to the case where all of the plurality of erosion areas in the predetermined effect display area is not eroded It is believed that the degree is high,
When making the effect image appear in the form of eroding a part of the plurality of erosion areas of the predetermined effect display area, a new effect different from the effect image made to appear to the already eroded erosion area Make it possible to appear as an image,
A game machine characterized in that the erosion degree of the predetermined effect display area is recognizable.